FIRST EDITION
21_DS_OM_EN_USC
©2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
CANADA
MOPAR.COM/OM
U.S.
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app,
go directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
2021 RAM 1500 CLASSIC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2021 RAM 1500 CLASSIC
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself
unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular
telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common
questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired
with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated
non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and
equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/
or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-866-726-4636 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada), or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting
www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and
your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................. 8
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................13
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 94
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................119
5 MULTIMEDIA ............................................................................................................................... 165
6 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................208
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .................................................................................................... 263
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................286
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................347
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................356
11 INDEX .............................................................................................................................................. 361
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
Symbols Key............................................................ 9
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS............................9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ..........9
Symbol Glossary...................................................10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ......................................................................13
Key Fobs.......................................................13
SENTRY KEY ..........................................................15
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................16
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) .....................16
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .........................17
How To Use Remote Start ...........................17
To Exit Remote Start Mode ........................18
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped ................................................... 19
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped ................................................... 19
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped.............................. 20
Remote Start Abort Message......................20
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ...............................20
To Arm The System...................................... 20
To Disarm The System.................................20
Rearming Of The System.............................21
Security System Manual Override ..............21
DOORS .................................................................. 21
Manual Door Locks...................................... 21
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ............... 22
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
(If Equipped) ................................................ 22
Automatic Doors Unlock —
If Equipped................................................... 24
Automatic Door Locks —
If Equipped................................................... 25
Child-Protection Door Lock ......................... 25
STEERING WHEEL ............................................... 26
Tilt Steering Column .................................... 26
Heated Steering Wheel —
If Equipped .................................................. 26
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS......27
Introducing Voice Recognition .................... 27
Basic Voice Commands............................... 27
Get Started................................................... 28
Additional Information................................. 28
SEATS .................................................................... 28
Manual Front Seat Adjustment................... 29
Manual Rear Seat Adjustment ................... 30
Power Driver Seat Adjustment —
If Equipped................................................... 30
Heated Seats — If Equipped ....................... 31
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped................... 33
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers
(Regular Cab Models).................................. 33
Head Restraints........................................... 33
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —
IF EQUIPPED .........................................................35
MIRRORS ..............................................................36
Inside Rearview Mirror ................................ 36
Illuminated Vanity Mirror —
If Equipped................................................... 37
Outside Mirrors ........................................... 37
Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped.................................... 38
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ...................... 38
Power Folding Outside Mirrors For
Standard And Trailer Tow — If Equipped.... 39
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped ......... 40
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..................... 40
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse —
If Equipped................................................... 40
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED ...........................41
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®....41
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ....... 41
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device .............. 41
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener................................................. 42
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device ................................. 43
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button........................................................... 44
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming..... 44
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................45
Headlight Switch .........................................45
Multifunction Lever...................................... 46
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped ................................................... 46
High/Low Beam Switch ............................... 46
Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control — If Equipped ..................................47
Flash-To-Pass ...............................................47
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ..........47
Parking Lights And Panel Lights .................47
Headlights On With Wipers ......................... 48
Headlight Delay............................................ 48
Lights-On Reminder.....................................48
Fog Lights — If Equipped ............................48
Turn Signals .................................................49
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ............. 49
Cargo Light With Bed Lights —
If Equipped .................................................. 49
Battery Saver................................................50
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................50
Courtesy Lights — If Equipped..................... 50
Illuminated Approach .................................51
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .............52
Windshield Wiper Operation ......................52
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ...........53
CLIMATE CONTROLS ........................................... 53
Automatic Climate Control
Descriptions And Functions ........................ 53
Manual Climate Control
Descriptions And Functions ....................... 57
Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) — If Equipped ..................................... 61
Climate Voice Recognition .......................... 62
Operating Tips ............................................. 62
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ............. 64
Storage ......................................................... 64
USB/MP3 Control ........................................ 68
Electrical Power Outlets .............................. 69
Power Inverter — If Equipped ..................... 71
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped ............... 71
WINDOWS ............................................................ 72
Power Windows — If Equipped ................... 72
Automatic Window Features ...................... 72
Reset Auto-Up ............................................. 73
Window Lockout Switch
(Four Door Models Only) ............................. 73
Power Sliding Rear Window —
If Equipped................................................... 73
Manual Sliding Rear Window —
If Equipped................................................... 74
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 74
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ....................74
Opening And Closing The Sunroof.............. 75
Pinch Protect Feature.................................. 75
Venting Sunroof........................................... 75
Sunshade Operation ................................... 75
Ignition Off Operation.................................. 75
Sunroof Maintenance.................................. 75
HOOD......................................................................76
To Open The Hood....................................... 76
To Close The Hood....................................... 76
TAILGATE ...............................................................76
Opening ........................................................ 76
Closing.......................................................... 76
Tailgate Removal......................................... 77
PICKUP BOX .........................................................79
Bed Rail Tie-Down System —
If Equipped .................................................. 80
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED.....................................82
Locking And Unlocking RamBox................. 82
RamBox Cargo Storage Bins....................... 83
RamBox Safety Warning ............................. 84
Bed Extender — If Equipped........................ 84
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS .............................................87
Camper Applications ...................................87
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED.....88
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal................88
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation............ 90
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning ................93
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .............................94
Base Instrument Cluster Descriptions .......95
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER.....................96
Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions... 97
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .......................98
Instrument Cluster Display Controls........... 98
Oil Life Reset .............................................100
Display Menu Items...................................100
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped ...............................107
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ............... 109
Red Warning Lights....................................109
Yellow Warning Lights ...............................111
Yellow Indicator Lights...............................115
Green Indicator Lights...............................115
White Indicator Lights................................116
Blue Indicator Lights..................................116
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ....116
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity................................117
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS.........................................................117
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ....................................119
Automatic Transmission............................119
Tip Start Feature .......................................119
AutoPark.....................................................119
If Engine Fails To Start .............................121
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) .........................122
After Starting..............................................122
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ........122
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .......122
PARKING BRAKE ...............................................123
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION............................124
Key Ignition Park Interlock —
If Equipped.................................................125
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
(BTSI) System.............................................125
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission ......126
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED ......................................................131
Four-Position Electronically Shifted
Transfer Case.............................................131
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL .......................... 133
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY —
5.7L ENGINES ONLY (IF EQUIPPED)................ 134
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING .......................... 134
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM .............................. 134
Cruise Control ............................................134
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM ................................................ 136
ParkSense Sensors ...................................137
ParkSense Warning Display......................137
ParkSense Display.....................................137
Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or
Rear ParkSense.........................................140
Service The ParkSense Park
Assist System.............................................140
Cleaning The ParkSense System..............141
ParkSense System Usage Precautions....141
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ............ 142
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ................................ 144
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ................145
VEHICLE LOADING ............................................ 145
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ......145
Payload.......................................................145
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ............145
Tire Size......................................................145
Rim Size .....................................................145
Inflation Pressure ......................................145
Curb Weight ...............................................145
Loading.......................................................145
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
TRAILER TOWING .............................................. 146
Common Towing Definitions .....................146
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum
Trailer Weight.............................................150
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) ..........151
Trailer And Tongue Weight .......................151
Towing Requirements ...............................151
Towing Tips ................................................157
SNOWPLOW ...................................................... 157
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) ................................... 158
Towing This Vehicle Behind
Another Vehicle..........................................158
Recreational Towing —
Two-Wheel Drive Models ...........................158
Recreational Towing —
Four-Wheel Drive Models ..........................159
DRIVING TIPS ..................................................... 162
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ....................162
Driving Through Water ..............................162
Off-Road Driving Tips.................................163
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS .......................................165
CYBERSECURITY ...............................................165
UCONNECT SETTINGS........................................166
Customer Programmable Features ..........166
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION ..............................180
System Overview .......................................180
Safety And General Information ...............182
UCONNECT MODES............................................183
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................183
Radio Mode ...............................................183
Media Mode ..............................................192
Phone Mode ..............................................195
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ....207
Regulatory And Safety Information...........207
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES.............................................208
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................208
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...209
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.........................217
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ... 217
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................. 221
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ...221
Important Safety Precautions...................221
Seat Belt Systems ....................................222
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)...231
Child Restraints .........................................240
SAFETY TIPS ...................................................... 259
Transporting Passengers ..........................259
Transporting Pets .....................................259
Safety Checks You Should Make
Inside The Vehicle ....................................260
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle ........................261
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...................... 263
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED.... 263
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ....................... 267
Preparations For Jacking ..........................268
Jack Location .............................................268
Removal Of Jack And Tools.......................268
Removing The Spare Tire..........................270
Jacking Instructions...................................271
To Stow The Flat Or Spare ........................274
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools ...............275
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
JUMP STARTING ................................................ 276
Preparations For Jump Start.....................277
Jump Starting Procedure...........................278
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ......................... 279
MANUAL PARK RELEASE ................................. 280
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............................ 281
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ....................... 283
Two-Wheel Drive Models...........................284
Four-Wheel Drive Models ..........................284
Emergency Tow Hooks —
If Equipped .................................................285
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ................................................................ 285
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....................... 285
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING................................... 286
Maintenance Plan......................................287
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 290
3.6L Engine ................................................290
5.7L Engine ...............................................291
Checking Oil Level......................................292
Adding Washer Fluid..................................292
Maintenance-Free Battery .......................292
Pressure Washing......................................293
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ..................................293
Engine Oil ..................................................294
Engine Oil Filter..........................................295
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ...........................295
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...................296
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ...............299
Body Lubrication........................................300
Windshield Wiper Blades ..........................300
Exhaust System ........................................302
Cooling System .........................................303
Brake System ............................................307
Automatic Transmission ...........................308
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving
Axle Fluid Level .........................................309
Transfer Case ............................................309
Fuses ..........................................................309
BULB REPLACEMENT ................................317
TIRES....................................................................322
Tire Safety Information .............................322
Tires — General Information ....................329
Tire Types ...................................................334
Spare Tires — If Equipped .........................335
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ....................337
Snow Traction Devices .............................338
Tire Rotation Recommendations .............340
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................................... 340
Treadwear ..................................................340
Traction Grades .........................................341
Temperature Grades .................................341
STORING THE VEHICLE .................................... 341
BODYWORK........................................................ 342
Protection From Atmospheric Agents.......342
Body And Underbody Maintenance..........342
Preserving The Bodywork..........................343
INTERIORS ......................................................... 345
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................345
Plastic And Coated Parts...........................346
Leather Surfaces .......................................346
Glass Surfaces ..........................................346
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ...... 347
BRAKE SYSTEM ................................................ 347
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ....347
Torque Specifications................................347
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...................................... 348
3.6L Engine ................................................349
5.7L Engine ................................................349
Reformulated Gasoline ............................349
Materials Added To Fuel ...........................349
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends......................349
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex
Fuel Vehicles..............................................350
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications...350
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline ..................351
Fuel System Cautions................................351
FLUID CAPACITIES ............................................ 352
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................ 353
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .............. 355
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE ..........................................356
Prepare For The Appointment...................356
Prepare A List.............................................356
Be Reasonable With Requests .................356
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE................................356
FCA US LLC Customer Center ...................357
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........357
Mexico ........................................................357
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ............357
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ................357
Service Contract .......................................357
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................. 358
MOPAR PARTS................................................... 358
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 358
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .......................................358
In Canada...................................................359
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ........................ 359
General Information.......................................... 360
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Ram vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and
maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the
two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited
for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your
driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome
the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision. See Ú page 162 for further information.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC
offers to its customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications
carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help
ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated
in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content
introduced throughout the Owner's Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement
of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Ram vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and
care about your satisfaction.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or
special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/
body builders. US residents refer to the Warranty Information, Section
2.1.C. Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of
the Warranty Information. Such equipment includes video monitors, DVD/
Blu-Ray™, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and
service on these items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed by the
conversion/camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your
vehicle. For any additional instructions, please contact your conversion/
camper manufacturer.
To obtain dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle, refer
to the Body Builder’s Guide at https://www.ramtrucks.com/
ram-commercial/body-builders-guide.html.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
These statements are against operating
procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information
on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
1
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the
definition of each symbol Ú page 109.
Red Warning Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 109
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 109
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 109
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 110
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 110
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 110
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 110
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 111
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning
Light
Ú page 111
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
Ú page 111
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 111
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 111
Red Warning Lights
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
Yellow Warning Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
Ú page 111
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 112
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 112
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 112
Low Coolant Level Warning Light
Ú page 113
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 113
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
Ú page 113
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 114
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 114
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 114
Yellow Indicator Lights
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Ú page 115
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
Ú page 115
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 115
Cargo Light — If Equipped
Ú page 115
Yellow Warning Lights
1
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
4WD Lock Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 115
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 115
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 115
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 115
Green Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Ú page 115
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 115
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 115
Yellow Indicator Lights
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If Equipped
With 7 Inch Instrument Cluster Display
Ú page 116
4WD AUTO Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 116
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 116
White Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator
Ú page 116
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If Equipped
With 3.5-Inch Instrument Cluster Display
Ú page 116
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 116
Green Indicator Lights
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOBS
Your vehicle is equipped with a standard
ignition key fob.
The standard ignition key fob operates the
ignition switch. Insert the square end of the key
fob into the ignition switch located on the
instrument panel and rotate to the desired
position. The key fob also contains an
emergency key, which is stored in the rear of the
key fob.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob For Standard Ignition
NOTE:
Inserting the key fob with integrated key into the
ignition switch disables the system from
responding to any button pushes from that key
fob. Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and
above disables the system from responding to
all key fob buttons for all key fobs.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Tailgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the driver’s door, or, twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors, the
tailgate and the RamBox (if equipped). To lock
all the doors and the tailgate, push the lock
button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals
will flash and the illuminated entry system will
be activated. When the doors are locked, the
turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the
first push of the unlock button. The horn chirp
when the lock button is pushed can be
programmed on/off within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 166.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a
battery obtained from Mopar. Aftermarket
coin battery dimensions may not meet the
original OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate for further informa-
tion.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are
on the back housing or the printed circuit
board.
1 — PANIC Button
2 — Unlock Button
3 — Lock Button
4 — Remote Start Button
5 — Emergency Key Location
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the
emergency key release (1) on the front of
the key fob sideways, and pulling the
emergency key (2) out with your other
hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Gently pry the two halves of the key fob
apart. Make sure not to damage the seal
during removal.
3. Remove the battery by turning the back
cover over (battery facing downward) and
tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as
a table or similar, then replace the battery.
When replacing the battery, match the (+)
sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the
inside of the battery clip, located on the
back cover. Avoid touching the new battery
with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery,
clean it with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two
halves together.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be re-purposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer Ú page 360.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, wireless ignition
node system, and a Radio Frequency (RF)
receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are
1 — Emergency Key Release
2 — Emergency Key
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle. The system cannot
reprogram a key fob obtained from another
vehicle.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, the vehicle security light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone
attempted to start the engine with an invalid key
fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to
start the engine but there is an issue with the
vehicle electronics, the engine will start and
shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics Ú page 360.
IGNITION SWITCH
IGNITION NODE MODULE (IGNM)
The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has four
operating positions, three with detents and one
that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are
OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position is a
spring-loaded momentary contact position.
When released from the START position, the
switch automatically returns to the ON/RUN
position.
Ignition Switch
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then shift the automatic
transmission into PARK, apply the parking
brake, place the engine in the OFF position,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless
ignition is in OFF position, remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
NOTE:
For more information on normal starting, see
Ú page 119.
Keyed ignition systems will chime in the OFF
or ACC position when the driver door is open.
In addition to the chime, the message “Key In
Ignition” will display in the cluster.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside
the vehicle while still maintaining
security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
Remote start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in
all ambient conditions before the driver enters
the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and the key
fob may reduce this range Ú page 360.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will
flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start, and
the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start
mode for a 15 minute cycle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Pushing the remote start button a third time
shuts the engine off.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run
for 15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
in 10 seconds.
The park lights will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power
sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
position before the Remote Start sequence
can be repeated for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
Fuel meets minimum requirement
System not disabled from previous remote
start event
Vehicle Security system not active
Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
Ignition in OFF position
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote
Start system, push and release the START/
STOP ignition button while pressing the brake
pedal prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle. If
the vehicle is not equipped with a START/STOP
ignition button, insert the mechanical key into
the ignition switch and place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off
with another push and release of the Remote
Start button on the key fob, or if the engine is
allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the climate controls will resume the
previously set operations (temperature, blower
control, etc.).
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable for two seconds after receiving a
valid Remote Start request.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When remote start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
the system will automatically activate front
defrost for 15 minutes or less. The time is
dependent on the ambient temperature. Once
the timer expires, the system will automatically
adjust the settings depending on ambient
conditions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems
— If Equipped” in the next section for detailed
operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When remote start is activated, the front and
rear defrost will automatically turn on in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel and driver
heated seat feature will turn on if programmed
in the comfort menu screen within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 166. In warm weather, the
driver vented seat feature will automatically
turn on when the remote start is activated and
is programmed in the comfort menu screen.
The vehicle will adjust the climate control
settings depending on the outside ambient
temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
The climate controls automatically adjust to an
optimal temperature and mode, dependent on
the outside ambient temperature. When the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the
climate controls will resume their previous
settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) —
If Equipped
In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or
below, the climate settings will default to
maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C)
to 78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be
based on the last settings selected by the
driver.
In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or
above, the climate settings will default to MAX
A/C, Bi-Level mode, with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
control settings, see Ú page 53.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration
of remote start, or until the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position. The climate control
settings will change, and exit the automatic
defaults, if manually adjusted by the driver
while the vehicle is in remote start mode. This
includes turning the climate controls off using
the OFF button.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E-ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When the Remote Start system is active and the
outside ambient temperature is less than 33°F
(0.6°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will
activate. Exiting remote start will resume its
previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will
continue.
REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to
Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system monitors the
vehicle doors, hood, tailgate, and the ignition for
unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle
Security system is armed, interior switches for
door locks are disabled. If something triggers
the alarm, the Vehicle Security system will
provide the following audible and visible
signals:
The horn will pulse
The turn signals will flash
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument
cluster will flash
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the OFF position.
For vehicles not equipped with Keyless
Entry, make sure the vehicle ignition is
OFF and the key fob is physically removed
from the ignition.
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior
power door lock switch with the driver
and/or passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid
key fob available in the same exterior
zone Ú page 22.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock
the door Ú page 22.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to
disarm the system.
For vehicles not equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, insert a valid key fob into the
ignition switch and turn the key to the
ON/RUN position.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
(Continued)
The Vehicle Security system is designed to
protect your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security
system will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system will rearm itself
after 15 minutes if the system has not been
disabled. If the condition which initiated the
alarm is still present, the system will ignore that
condition and monitor the remaining doors and
ignition.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you
lock the doors using the manual door lock.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked
from inside the vehicle by using the door lock
knob. To lock each door, push the door lock
knob on each door trim panel downward. To
unlock the front doors, pull the inside door
handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim
panel upward. If the lock knob is down when the
door is closed, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle
before closing the door.
NOTE:
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
Vehicle Security system.
Door Lock Knob
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
For personal security and safety in the
event of an collision, lock the vehicle doors
as you drive as well as when you park and
leave the vehicle.
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
automatic transmission into PARK or
REVERSE, apply the parking brake, place
the ignition in the OFF position, remove the
key fobs from vehicle, and lock all doors.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
The power door lock switches are located on
each front door panel. Push the switch to lock or
unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switches
NOTE:
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Keyless Enter-N-Go system if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’s
wireless signal and prevent the Keyless
Enter-N-Go system from starting the vehicle.
If you push the power door lock switch while the
key fob is in the ignition, and any front door is
open, the power locks will not operate. This
prevents you from accidentally locking your key
fob in the vehicle. Removing the key fob or
closing the door will allow the locks to operate.
A chime will sound if the key fob is in the ignition
switch and a door is open, as a reminder to
remove the key fob.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE
E
NTRY (IF EQUIPPED )
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry. This feature allows
you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s)
without having to push the key fob lock or
unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on or off
within Uconnect Settings Ú page 166.
The key fob may not be detected by the
vehicle Passive Entry system if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other elec-
tronic device; these devices may block the
key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
Passive Entry system from locking/unlocking
the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle,
the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and (if equipped) will arm
the Vehicle Security system.
The Vehicle Security system can be armed/
disarmed by pushing the Passive Entry key
fob lock/unlock buttons (if equipped).
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to
unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door
handle will unlock the driver door automatically.
Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock
all doors and the tailgate automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will
unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s
door handle, depending on the selected setting
in the Uconnect system Ú page 166.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which
will function if the ignition is OFF.
There are three situations that trigger a
FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will
be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob
inside the vehicle, the vehicle will unlock and
alert the customer.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside
the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors
when any of the following conditions are true:
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
If a paired key fob is found outside of the
vehicle, FOBIK-Safe will not activate.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then the
doors are closed.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Tailgate:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either front door handles,
pushing the Passive Entry lock button will lock
the vehicle.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle lock button,
you must wait two seconds before you can
lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive
Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle, without the vehicle unlocking.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is depleted.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the key fob lock button or the lock button
located on the vehicle’s interior door panel
Ú page 360.
AUTOMATIC DOORS UNLOCK —
I
F EQUIPPED
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the
vehicle when either front door is opened. This
will occur only after the vehicle has been shifted
into the PARK position after the vehicle has
been driven (shifted out of PARK and all doors
closed).
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
The Automatic Doors Unlock feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen
radio Ú page 98.
For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen
radio Ú page 166.
NOTE:
Use the Auto Unlock Doors feature in accor-
dance with local laws.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the doors will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature
can be enabled or disabled by an authorized
dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
To provide a safer environment for small
children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors
are equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a
flat blade screwdriver, and rotate the dial to the
lock or unlock position. When the system on a
door is engaged, that door can only be opened
by using the outside door handle even if the
inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
Child-Protection Door Lock
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using
the outside door handle even though the
inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the
inside to make certain it is in the unlocked
position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside
to make certain it is in the locked position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
pull up on the door lock knob (unlocked posi-
tion), roll down the window, and open the
door with the outside door handle.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children.
After engaging the child lock on both rear doors,
check for effective engagement by trying to
open a door with the internal handle. Once the
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged,
it is impossible to open the doors from inside
the vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be
sure to check that there is no one left inside.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors can
only be opened from the outside with the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
STEERING WHEEL
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. The tilt lever is
located on the steering column, below the
multifunction lever.
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to
unlock the steering column. With one hand
firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering
column up or down, as desired. Release the
lever to lock the steering column firmly in place.
Tilt Steering Lever
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will operate for an
average of 80 minutes before automatically
shutting off. This time may vary based on the
temperature of the surrounding environment or
the heated steering wheel may not turn on
when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located on the center instrument panel below
the touchscreen, as well as within the climate or
controls screen of the touchscreen.
Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 19.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-
ical conditions must exercise care when
using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
wheel heater to overheat.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR)
system.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in
the Apps menus of your 8.4-inch touchscreen,
you have the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not,
you have a Uconnect 4C with 8.4-inch display
system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button. After the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
Voice Recognition system’s status.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate /deactivate
your Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first
push the VR button, wait until after the beep,
then say your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR button
and saying a Voice Command from the
current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Ú page 360.
For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
week) or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
1 — Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions
2 — Push To Initiate, Answer, End A Phone Call, Or
Send/Receive A Text
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
MANUAL FRONT SEAT ADJUSTMENT
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Both front seats are adjustable forward or
rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle
is located under the seat cushion at the front
edge of each seat.
Manual Seat Adjustment Bar
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle
and slide the seat forward or rearward. Release
the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure
that the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side
of the seat. To recline the seat, lean forward
slightly, lift the lever, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the
seatback to its normal upright position, lean
forward and lift the lever. Release the lever
once the seatback is in the upright position.
Manual Recline Lever
Dump Feature (Manual Recline Seat Only) —
Standard Cab
Actuating the recliner handle will allow the
seatback to swing (dump) forward on manual
recliner seats. This “dump” feature allows
access to the storage bin behind the seat.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while
actuating the handle. The seatback may
swing forward and hit you causing injury.
To avoid injury, place your hand on the seat-
back and actuate the handle, then position
the seatback in the desired position.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped
The seat is divided into three segments. The
outboard seat portions are each 40% of the
total width of the seat. If equipped, the back of
the center portion (20%) easily folds down to
provide an armrest/center storage
compartment.
MANUAL REAR SEAT ADJUSTMENT
Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped
The recliner handle is located on the outside of
the seat cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift
upward on the handle, lean back on the
seatback and when you reach the desired
position, release the handle.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle
POWER DRIVER SEAT ADJUSTMENT —
I
F EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with an
eight-way power driver's seat. The power seat
switches are located on the outboard side of the
driver's seat cushion. There are two power seat
switches that are used to control the movement
of the seat cushion and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward by using the power seat switch. The
seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position
has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down by using the power seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair
visibility or become a dangerous projectile in
a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Seatback Switch
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
(Continued)
(Continued)
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
up or down using the power seat switch. The
front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted
forward or rearward by using the power seat
switch. The seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position is reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or
passenger seats may also be equipped with
power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is
located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support.
Lumbar Control Switch
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
On some models, the front and rear seats may
be equipped with heaters located in the seat
cushions and seatbacks.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat’s path.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are
located on the center instrument panel below
the climate controls.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen,
the front heated seats control buttons are also
located within the climate or controls screen of
the touchscreen.
Press the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second
time to turn the LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time
to turn the heating elements off.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater
will provide a boosted heat level during the first
four minutes of operation. Then, the heat
output will drop to the normal HI-level. If the
HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous
operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn off automatically after
approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 19.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are
equipped with heated seats. The heated seat
switches for these seats are located on the rear
of the center console.
There are two heated seat switches that allow
the rear passengers to operate the seats
independently. You can choose from HI, LO or
OFF heat settings. Amber indicator lights in
each switch indicate the level of heat in use.
Push the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second
time to turn the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time
to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater
will provide a boosted heat level during the first
four minutes of operation. Then, the heat
output will drop to the normal HI-level. If the
HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous
operation. At that time, the number of
illuminated LEDs changes from two to one,
indicating the change. The LO-level setting will
turn off automatically after approximately
45 minutes.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
(Continued)
VENTILATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Front Ventilated Seats
Located in the seat cushion are small fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment,
and move air through fine perforations in the
seat cover to help keep the driver and front
passenger cooler in higher ambient
temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,
HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are
located on the center instrument panel below
the climate controls.
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen,
the front ventilated seats control buttons are
also located within the climate or controls
screen of the touchscreen.
Press the ventilated seat button once to
choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second
time to choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a third
time to turn the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 19.
PLASTIC GROCERY BAG RETAINERS
(R
EGULAR CAB MODELS)
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery
bag handles are attached to the underside of
the rear seat cushion. To access these hooks,
lift the rear seat cushion upward.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
Front Head Restraint Adjustment
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button located on the
base of the head restraint and push downward
on the head restraint.
Release/Adjustment Buttons
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat
until the head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING! (Continued)
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180
degrees to the incorrect position in an attempt
to gain additional clearance to the back of the
head.
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable
and removable head restraints. To raise the
head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the
adjustment button located on the base of the
head restraint and push downward on the head
restraint.
Outboard Head Restraint Buttons
Center Head Restraint Buttons
NOTE:
The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab and
Quad Cab) has only one adjustment position
that is used to aid in the routing of a tether
Ú page 221.
Do not reposition the head restraint
180 degrees to the incorrect position in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the
back of the head.
Front Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as
it can go. Then, push the adjustment button and
the release button at the base of each post while
pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes. Then, adjust it to the appropriate height.
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain
additional clearance to the back of the head.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Rear Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, push the
adjustment button and the release button while
pulling upward on the whole assembly. To
reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and adjust it to the
appropriate height.
NOTE:
To remove outboard restraints, the rear seat
bottom must be folded up.
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —
IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to
allow a greater range of driver comfort for
steering wheel tilt and seat position. This feature
allows the brake and accelerator pedals to move
toward or away from the driver to provide
improved position with the steering wheel.
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left
side of the steering column.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition
placed in the OFF position.
The pedals cannot be adjusted when the
vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Cruise
Control system is on. If there is an attempt to
adjust the pedals when the system is locked
out, the following messages will appear (on
vehicles equipped with an instrument cluster
display):
Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise
Control Engaged
Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In
Reverse
NOTE:
Always adjust the pedals to a position that
allows full movement of the pedal.
Further small adjustments may be necessary
to find the best possible seat/pedal position.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is
moving. You could lose control and have an
accident. Always adjust the pedals while the
vehicle is parked.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of
the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Adjusting Manual Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is
disabled when the vehicle is in REVERSE to
improve the driver’s rear view.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned
on or off through the touchscreen.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable
pedals or impede its ability to move, as it may
cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal
travel may become limited if movement is
stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable
pedal's path.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View
Camera Display — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
When the vehicle is placed in REVERSE, a video
display illuminates to display the image
generated by the rear view camera located on
the tailgate handle. The Automatic Dimming
Mirror feature is disabled to improve the
driver’s rear view.
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRROR —
I
F EQUIPPED
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
one of the visors and lift the cover.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor —
If Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor
to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun
blockage.
“Slide-On-Rod” Extender
NOTE:
The sun visor can also be extended while the
sun visor is against the windshield for additional
sun blockage through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the
center of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve
the optimal view.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with puddle lamps
under the outside mirrors, they can be turned
off through the Uconnect system Ú page 166.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be
manually folded both forward and rearward to
prevent damage.
Folding Mirror
DRIVER'S OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC
D
IMMING MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically
adjust for glare from vehicles behind you. This
feature is controlled by the inside Automatic
Dimming mirror and will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The controls for the power mirrors are located
on the driver's door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls
The power mirror controls consist of mirror
select buttons and a four-way mirror control
switch.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the
passenger side convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than they really are. Relying
too much on your passenger side convex
mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex
passenger side mirror.
CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the
full rearward position to resist damage when
entering a car wash or a narrow location.
1 — Left Mirror Selection
2 — Mirror Direction Control
3 — Right Mirror Selection
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R
(right) button to select the mirror that you want
to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of
the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Movement
POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS
F
OR STANDARD AND TRAILER TOW —
I
F EQUIPPED
The power folding mirrors can be folded
rearward and unfolded into the normal driving
position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is
located between the power mirror switches L
(left) and R (right). Push the switch once and the
mirrors will fold in, push the switch a second
time and the mirrors will return to the normal
driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after a powered
cycle, a potential extra button push is required
to get the mirrors back to the normal driving
position. If the mirror does not fold
automatically, check for ice or dirt build up at
the pivot area, which can cause excessive drag.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors
if the following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
folding.
The mirrors are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded (by hand or by pushing the
power folding mirror switch).
The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal
driving speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and
unfold them by pushing the button (this may
require multiple attempts). This resets them to
their normal driving position.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TRAILER TOWING MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable
mirror head to provide a greater vision range
when towing extra-wide loads. To change
position inboard or outboard, the mirror head
should be rotated (flipped in or out).
Trailer Towing Position
NOTE:
Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to
entering an automated car wash.
A small blindspot mirror is located next to the
main mirror and can be adjusted manually.
Blindspot Mirror
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped)
Ú
page 53.
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE —
I
F EQUIPPED
This feature provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will assist with the driver’s
ground visibility. The outside mirrors will move
slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The
outside mirrors will then return to the original
position when the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 166.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® Buttons
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates,
lighting, or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles
12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in
the overhead console or sunvisor designate
the three different HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release
any of the programmed HomeLink® buttons.
These buttons will activate the devices they
are programmed to with each press of the
corresponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located
above the center button.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio frequency signal, it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are
trying to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the
channels of your HomeLink® before you use it
for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or
until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first
time. Do not erase channels when programming
additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine
whether the device has a rolling code or
non-rolling code.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date.
Typically, devices manufactured after 1995
have rolling codes. A device with a rolling code
will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button
located where the antenna is attached to the
device. The button may not be immediately
visible when looking at the device. The name
and color of the button may vary slightly by
manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will
not have a rolling code. These devices will also
not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, follow
the steps below:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using
this procedure. You do not need to erase all
channels when programming additional
buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1
to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program,
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold
the garage door opener transmitter button
you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the HomeLink® indicator light. The
HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly
and then rapidly. Once this happens,
release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
non-rolling code final steps.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener motor. Firmly push
and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button three
times (holding the button for two seconds
each time). If the garage door opener motor
operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the final
steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final
Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the steps
from the beginning.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink®
to a miscellaneous device follows the same
procedure as programming to a garage door
opener Ú page 42. Be sure to determine if the
device has a rolling code, or non-rolling code
before beginning the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian radio frequency laws require trans-
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal
during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner. The procedure
may need to be performed multiple times to
successfully pair the device to your HomeLink®
buttons.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people or pets are in the path
of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage
or confined area while programming the
transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous when inhaled and can cause you
and others to be severely injured or killed.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that
has been previously trained, without erasing all
the channels, follow the procedure below. Be
sure to determine whether the new device you
want to program the HomeLink® button to has
a Rolling Code, or Non-rolling Code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the HomeLink® Indicator light
begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” Ú page 42, and
follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN /GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/
United States that require the transmitter
signals to “time-out” after several seconds of
transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may
not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating
of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink®
button, while you press and release
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every
two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal.
The indicator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to
change flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds
or longer in rare cases. The garage door
may open and close while you are
programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
indicator light.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each
remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device
for programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
step 2 and follow all remaining steps
Ú page 360.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side
of the instrument panel. The headlight switch
controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo
lights and fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a
headlight switch without the O (off) position. In
order to turn the exterior lights off, the headlight
switch must be rotated to AUTO position.
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise to the headlight position. When the
headlight switch is on, the parking lights, taillights,
license plate light and instrument panel lights are
also turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the
headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Cargo Light Switch
3 — Push Fog Light Switch
4 — Dimmer Control
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Cargo Light Switch
3 — Push Fog Light Switch
4 — Dimmer Control
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the
headlight switch clockwise from the AUTO
position to the first detent for parking light and
instrument panel light operation. Rotate to the
second detent to turn on headlight, parking
light, and instrument panel light operation.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight
and fog light (if equipped) lenses that are
lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass lights. Plastic is not as scratch resis-
tant as glass and therefore different lens
cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid
wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt,
wash with a mild soap solution followed by
rinsing.
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on
whenever the engine is running, and the low
beams are not on. The lights will remain on until
the ignition is placed in the OFF or ACC position,
or the parking brake is engaged.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the DRLs will
automatically deactivate when the front fog
lights are turned on.
If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the DRLs can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 166.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running
Lights may deactivate or reduce intensity on
one side of the vehicle (when a turn signal is
activated on that side), or on both sides of
the vehicle (when the hazard warning lights
are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the
instrument panel to switch the headlights to
high beams. Pulling the multifunction lever
back will turn the low beams on.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other abrasive
materials to clean the lenses.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP
C
ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at
night by automating high beam control through
the use of a digital camera mounted on the
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects
vehicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the
approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control can be turned on or off by selecting
“ON” under “Auto Dim High Beams” within
your Uconnect Settings
Ú
page 166, as well
as turning the headlight switch to the AUTO
position.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights
and taillights of vehicles in the field of view
will cause headlights to remain on longer
(closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and
other obstructions on the windshield or
camera lens will cause the system to func-
tion improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam
Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the
mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper
performance. See a local authorized dealer.
To opt out of the Advanced Auto High Beam
Sensitivity Control (default) and enter
Reduced High Beam Sensitivity Control (not
recommended), toggle the high beam lever 6
full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
placing the ignition in the ON position. The
system will return to the default setting upon
placing the ignition in the OFF position.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction
lever toward you. This will cause the high beam
headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the
lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS —
I
F EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To
turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch
to the AUTO position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place
the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the
automatic headlights off, turn the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise. To turn off the parking lights, rotate
the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the head-
light switch to the AUTO position to turn off the
parking lights.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEADLIGHTS ON WITH WIPERS
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic
Headlights, it also has this
customer-programmable feature. When your
headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn
on when the wiper system is on. This feature is
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 166.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the
daytime, the instrument panel lights will auto-
matically dim to the lower nighttime intensity.
HEADLIGHT DELAY
To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight
delay feature will leave the headlights on for up
to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the
ignition is placed in the OFF position while the
headlight switch is on, and then the headlight
switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be
cancelled by either turning the headlight switch
on then off, or by placing the ignition in the ON
position.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system Ú page 166.
The headlight delay feature is automatically
activated if the headlight switch is left in the
AUTO position when the ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights
are left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position, the vehicle will chime when the
driver’s door is opened.
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the
headlight switch to the parking light or headlight
position and pushing in the headlight rotary
control.
Fog Light Switch
Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
The fog lights will operate only when the parking
lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are
on low beam. An indicator light located in the
instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog
lights are on. The fog lights will turn off when the
switch is pushed a second time, when the
headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or
the high beam is selected.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each
side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec-
tive outside light bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal will flash three times then automatically
turn off.
CARGO LIGHT WITH BED LIGHTS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) are
turned on by pushing the cargo light button
located just below the headlight switch.
Cargo/Bed Light Button
Cargo/Bed Light Button (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
When the vehicle is stationary, these lights can
also be turned on using the switch located just
inside the pickup box. A telltale will illuminate in
the instrument cluster display when these lights
are on. Pushing the switch a second time will
turn the lights off.
Bed Light Switch Without RamBox
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) will
turn on for approximately 60 seconds when a
key fob unlock button is pushed, as part of the
Illuminated Entry feature.
NOTE:
The cargo light will automatically turn off if the
vehicle is shifted into NEUTRAL or DRIVE, and
will turn back on when the vehicle is shifted into
PARK or REVERSE. The bed lights are not
affected by gear selection.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
BATTERY SAVER
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior
lights to protect the life of your vehicle’s battery.
After 10 minutes, if the ignition is OFF and any
door is left open or the dimmer control is rotated
all the way up to the dome light on position, the
interior lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the
headlights are turned on and left on for eight
minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
COURTESY LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the
front doors are opened, when the dimmer control
(rotating wheel on the bottom of the switch) is
rotated to the far right detent position. If your
vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry,
and the unlock button is pushed on the key fob,
the courtesy and dome lights will turn on.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Both lights in the overhead console and rear
passenger compartment will illuminate as
courtesy lights when a door is opened, when the
dimmer control is rotated to the courtesy light
position (full right position), or when the unlock
button is pushed on the key fob. These lights
are also operated individually as reading lights
by pushing on the corresponding lens.
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
NOTE:
The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pushed a second time, so be sure
they have been turned off before exiting the
vehicle. If the interior lights are left on after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position, they will
automatically turn off after 15 minutes.
Ambient Light — If Equipped
The overhead console is equipped with an
ambient light feature. This light casts
illumination for improved visibility of the floor
console area.
Ambient Light
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Dimmer Control
The brightness of the instrument panel as well
as the ambient lighting can be regulated by
rotating the dimmer control to the right
(brighter) or to the left (dimmer).
Dimmer Control
Dimmer Control (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
Party Mode
When a door is open and the interior lights are
on, rotating the dimmer control all the way left,
to the off detent, will cause all the interior lights
to go out. This is also known as the "Party" mode
because it allows the doors to stay open for
extended periods of time without discharging
the vehicle's battery.
Parade Mode
When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip
odometer, radio and overhead console by
rotating the control to the right until you hear a
click. This feature is termed the “Parade” mode
and is useful when headlights are required
during the day.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen,
the dimming of the touchscreen is program-
mable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 166.
ILLUMINATED APPROACH
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
key fob to unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting
in the outside mirrors (if equipped) Ú page 36.
The lights will fade off after approximately 30
seconds, or they will immediately fade off once
the ignition switch is changed to ON/RUN from
the OFF position.
The front courtesy overhead console and door
courtesy lights will not turn off if the dimmer
control is in the “Dome ON” position.
The illuminated entry system will not operate if
the dimmer control is in the “Dome OFF”
position.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated
approach lights under the outside mirrors, they
can be turned off by moving the instrument
panel dimmer into the “Dome Defeat” detent
position.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are
located on the multifunction lever on the left
side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located on the
end of the lever.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Intermittent Wipers
The intermittent feature of this system was
designed for use when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable
pause between cycles, desirable. For maximum
delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
upward to the first detent.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the
knob until it enters the low continual speed
position. The delay can be regulated from a
maximum of about 18 seconds between cycles,
to a cycle every one second. The delay intervals
will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer
knob, located on the end of the multifunction
lever, inward and hold. Washer fluid will be
sprayed and the wiper will operate for two to
three cycles after the washer knob is released.
If the washer knob pushed while in the delay
range, the wiper will operate for several
seconds after the washer knob is released. It
will then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected. If the washer knob is
pushed while in the off position, the wiper will
turn on and cycle approximately three times
after the wash knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information
can be found on most washer fluid containers.
Mist
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or
spray from a passing vehicle is needed, push
the washer knob, located on the end of the
multifunction lever, inward briefly and release.
The wipers will cycle one time and automatically
shut off.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 300.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the
windshield could lead to a collision. You might
not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To
avoid sudden icing of the windshield during
freezing weather, warm the windshield with
the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the
windshield and automatically activates the
wipers. Rotate the end of the multifunction
lever to one of four detent positions to activate
this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay
position one is the least sensitive, and wiper
delay detent position four is the most sensitive.
Wiper delay position three should be used for
normal rain conditions.
Positions one and two can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity. Position four can
be used if the driver desires more sensitivity.
Place the wiper switch in the O (off) position
when not using the system.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or
high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice, or dried salt water is
present on the windshield.
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or
silicone may reduce Rain Sensing perfor-
mance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 166.
The Rain Sensing system has protection
features for the wiper blades and arms, and will
not operate under the following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature — When the igni-
tion is first placed in the ON position, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the
wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside
temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the automatic transmission
is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing
system will not operate until the wiper switch is
moved, vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph
(5 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of
the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with Remote Start system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the remote start mode.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to
regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction
of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The
controls are located on the touchscreen (if
equipped) and on the instrument panel below
the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display With Automatic
Temperature Controls
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With Automatic
Temperature Controls
NOTE:
Icons and descriptions can vary based upon
vehicle equipment.
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button
on the touchscreen to change the
current setting to the coldest output
of air. The MAX A/C indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the
button again will cause the MAX A/C operation
to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on
the touchscreen, or push the button
on the faceplate to change the
current setting. The A/C indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate, to change the system
between Recirculation mode and
outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator
and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions, such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes.
Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the
touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that
could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield. The A/C can be deselected
manually without disturbing the mode control
selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation
mode may make the inside air stuffy and
window fogging may occur. Extended use of this
mode is not recommended.
Auto Button
Set your desired temperature and
press AUTO. AUTO will achieve and
maintain your desired temperature by
automatically adjusting the blower
speed and air distribution. AUTO mode is highly
recommended for efficiency.
You can turn AUTO on in one of two ways:
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen.
Push the button on the faceplate.
Toggling this function will cause the system to
switch between manual mode and automatic
mode Ú page 61.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push
and release the button on the
faceplate, to change the current airflow
setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost
indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air
comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level may increase. Use
Defrost mode with maximum temperature
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
(Continued)
settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front
defrost mode button, the climate system will
return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push
and release the button on the
faceplate, to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is
on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 15 minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And
Down Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate
or touchscreen, or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red
arrow button on the touchscreen for
warmer temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate
or touchscreen, or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue
arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display will
only appear if the system is equipped with an
automatic climate control system.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC
feature on/off. The SYNC indicator
illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC
synchronizes the passenger temperature
setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger’s temperature setting
while in SYNC will automatically exit this
feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount
of air forced through the climate
control system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting
the blower will cause automatic mode to switch
to manual operation. The speeds can be
selected using either the blower control knob on
the faceplate or the buttons on the
touchscreen.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the
blower control knob clockwise from the lowest
blower setting. The blower speed decreases as
you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower
setting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. Blower can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the
Mode buttons on the touchscreen, or
pushing the Mode button on the
faceplate, to change the airflow
distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode
can be adjusted so air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost
outlets, and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A
slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor,
defrost, and side window demister
outlets. This setting works best in cold
or snowy conditions that require extra
heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on
the touchscreen, or push the OFF
button on the faceplate (if equipped)
to turn the Climate Control on/off.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display With Manual
Temperature Controls
MAX A/C Setting
Set the temperature control knob to
the MAX A/C setting to change the
current setting to the coldest output
of air. Moving the temperature control
knob away from the MAX A/C setting causes the
MAX A/C operation to exit.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is
in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase
blower speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser (located in front of the radi-
ator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front
of the radiator and through the condenser.
Recirculation Button
Push the Recirculation button to
change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air
mode. The Recirculation indicator and
the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions, such as
smoke, odors, dust, or humidity are present.
Recirculation can be used in all modes except
for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the
mode control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended
use of this mode is not recommended.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, the
Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost
mode to improve window cleaning operation.
Recirculation is disabled automatically if this
mode is selected. Attempting to use
Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED
in the control button to blink and then turn off.
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the mode control knob to the
Front Defrost mode setting. Air comes
from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost
button is selected, the blower level may
increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and
side window defrosting and defogging.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost
Control button to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). The
Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear
window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after
15 minutes.
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature
of the air forced through the climate system.
The temperature increases as you
turn the temperature control knob
clockwise.
The temperature decreases as you
turn the temperature control knob
counterclockwise.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount
of air forced through the climate
control system. There are seven
blower speeds available. The blower
speed increases as you turn the blower control
knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the
blower control knob counterclockwise.
Mode Control
Turn the mode control knob to adjust
airflow distribution. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so
air comes from the instrument panel
outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and
demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A
slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor,
defrost, and side window demister
outlets. This setting works best in cold
or snowy conditions that require extra
heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Manual Climate Controls With A
Touchscreen
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With Manual
Temperature Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button
on the touchscreen to change the
current setting to the coldest output
of air. The MAX A/C indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the
button again will cause the MAX A/C operation
to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate to change the current
setting. The A/C indicator illuminates
when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate, to change the system
between Recirculation mode and
outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator
and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions, such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes.
Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the
touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that
could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield. The A/C can be deselected
manually without disturbing the mode control
selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation
mode may make the inside air stuffy and
window fogging may occur. Extended use of this
mode is not recommended.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push
and release the button on the
faceplate, to change the current airflow
setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost
indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air
comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level may increase. Use
Defrost mode with maximum temperature
settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front
defrost mode button, the climate system will
return to the previous setting.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push
and release the button on the
faceplate, to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is
on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 15 minutes.
Temperature Control
These buttons provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate
or touchscreen, or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red
arrow button on the touchscreen for
warmer temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate
or touchscreen, or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue
arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC
feature on/off. The SYNC indicator
illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC
synchronizes the passenger temperature
setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger’s temperature setting
while in SYNC will automatically exit this
feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount
of air forced through the climate
control system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting
the blower will cause automatic mode to switch
to manual operation. The speeds can be
selected using either the blower control knob on
the faceplate or the buttons on the
touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the
blower control knob clockwise from the lowest
blower setting. The blower speed decreases as
you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower
setting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. Blower can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the
Mode buttons on the touchscreen, or
pushing the Mode button on the
faceplate, to change the airflow
distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode
can be adjusted so air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost
outlets, and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A
slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor,
defrost, and side window demister
outlets. This setting works best in cold
or snowy conditions that require extra
heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on
the touchscreen, or push the OFF
button on the faceplate (if equipped)
to turn the Climate Control on/off.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC) — I
F EQUIPPED
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like
the system to maintain by adjusting the
driver and passenger temperature control
buttons. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The temperature can be displayed in US or
Metric units by selecting the US/Metric
customer-programmable feature within
Uconnect Settings Ú page 166.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The blower will increase in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system
is being used in the manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE RECOGNITION
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and
keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say one of the following commands:
“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did you know: Voice Command for Climate may
only be used to adjust the interior temperature
of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling
system is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate
Control system when the vehicle is being stored
for an extended period of time, see
Ú page 341.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
air distribution box, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to
have it replaced when needed.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating
element located at the base of the windshield.
It operates automatically once the following
conditions are met:
Activation By Front Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically
during a cold weather manual start with full
defrost, and when the ambient temperature
is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically
when the Rear Defrost is operating and the
ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation
When the Remote Start is activated and the
outside ambient temperature is less than
33°F (0.6°C) the windshield wiper de-icer is
activated. Upon exiting Remote Start, the
climate control functions will resume their
previous operation except, if the de-icer is
active, the de-icer timer and operation will
continue.
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control
to (Panel Mode),
(A/C) on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows for
a minute to flush out
the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn on (A/C) and
set the mode control
to the (Panel
Mode) position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in
(Bi-Level Mode)
position.
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control
to (Floor Mode)
and turn on (A/C)
to keep windows
clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control
to the (Floor Mode)
position. If windshield
fogging starts to
occur, move the
control to the (Mix
Mode) position.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel and
features both an upper and lower storage area.
Glove Compartment
To open the upper glove compartment, push
upward on the release handle.
To open the lower glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
NOTE:
Some vehicles may be equipped with an upper
storage area that is completely open and does
not have a cover.
Door Storage
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage areas are located in the door trim
panels.
Rear Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage compartments are located in both the
driver and passenger rear door trim panels.
Center Storage Compartment —
If Equipped
The center storage compartment is located
between the driver and passenger seats. The
storage compartment provides an armrest and
contains both an upper and lower storage area.
Center Storage Compartment
1 — Upper Glove Compartment
2 — Lower Glove Compartment
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove
compartment in the open position. Driving
with the glove compartment open may result
in injury in a collision.
WARNING!
This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated
on the armrest could be seriously injured
during vehicle operation, or a collision. Only
use the center seating position when the
armrest is fully upright.
In a collision, the latch may open if the total
weight of the items stored exceeds about
10 lbs (4.5 kg). These items could be
thrown about endangering occupants of
the vehicle. Items stored should not exceed
a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Pull on the upper handle on the front of the
armrest to raise the cover. The upper storage
area contains a USB power outlet that can be
used to power small electrical devices.
Upper Storage Compartment
With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower
handle to open the lower storage bin.
Lower Storage Bin
The center console is equipped with a front
storage bin located next to the cupholders. This
storage bin may be equipped with a manual
sliding top door.
Front Storage Bin With Door (If Equipped)
Seatback Storage
Located in the back of both the driver and
passenger front seats are pockets that can be
used for storage.
Driver’s Side Seatback Storage
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin —
If Equipped
In-floor storage bins are located in front of the
second row seats and can be used for extra
storage. The storage bins have removable liners
that can be easily removed for cleaning.
In-Floor Storage Bin And Latch
To open the in-floor storage bin, lift upward on
the handle of the latch and open the lid.
NOTE:
The front seat may have to be moved forward to
fully open the lid.
Opened Storage Bin
Storage Bin (Regular Cab)
The storage bin is located behind the front
seats and runs the length of the cab.
Storage Bin
Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped
Quad Cab and Crew Cab models with a 60/40
rear seat may be equipped with a folding load
floor.
WARNING!
Do not operate the vehicle with loose items
stored on the load floor. While driving or in an
accident you may experience abrupt stopping,
rapid acceleration, or sharp turns. Loose
objects stored on the load floor may move
around with force and strike occupants,
resulting in serious or fatal injury.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Unfolding The Load Floor (Quad Cab)
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the
upward position.
Unfolding The Load Floor
2. Grab the knob on the load floor and lift until
the load floor unfolds into position.
Load Floor In Open Position
3. Reverse the procedure to store the load
floor.
Unfolding The Load Floor (Crew Cab)
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the
upward position.
Load Floor Legs In Stowed Position
2. Unfold both the legs using the straps.
Load Floor Legs In Opened Position
3. Lift the front panel until the load floor
unfolds into position.
Load Floor In Open Position
4. Reverse the procedure to store the load
floor.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Positioning The Load Floor For Storage Access
Under The Seat
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the
upward position.
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either
side of the load floor.
3. Lift the load floor up to access storage
under the load floor.
Load Floor Securing Straps (Crew Cab)
4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor
back in the secured down position before
you operate the vehicle.
Below Rear Seat Storage (Crew Cab/Quad
Cab)
The Crew Cab and Quad Cab models provide
additional storage under the rear seats. Lift the
seats to access the storage compartment.
To open the storage compartments, unsnap the
securing snap located at either side of the load
floor and lift upward on the fold flat lid
Ú page 66.
Crew Cab Storage
USB/MP3 C ONTROL
Located inside the center console upper lid, this
feature allows an external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port
may activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped.
Center Console USB/AUX Media Hub
Refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement, the applicable radio section in this
manual, or visit UconnectPhone.com for further
information.
WARNING!
Do not drive with the load floor in the up
position. When stopping fast or in an
accident, the load floor could move to the
down position causing serious injury.
1 — USB Port #1
2 — Aux Jack
3 — USB Port #2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
(Continued)
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets
can provide power for in-cab accessories
designed for use with the standard “cigar
lighter” plug. The 12 Volt power outlets and USB
port (Charge Only) have a cap attached to the
outlet indicating “12V DC”, together with either
a key symbol, battery symbol, or USB symbol.
A key symbol indicates that the ignition must be
in the ON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to
provide power. The battery symbol indicates
that the outlet is connected to the battery, and
can provide power at all times.
The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the
following locations:
Lower left and lower right of the center stack
when equipped with a bench seat.
Center Stack Power Outlet
Center console when equipped with bucket
seats.
Power Outlet — Center Console
Rear of the center console storage compart-
ment — Quad Cab or Crew Cab.
Power Outlet — Rear Center Console
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watts (13 Amps) power rating is
exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Outlet — Rear Center Console Fuse
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
When the vehicle is turned off, be sure to
unplug any equipment as to not drain the
battery of the vehicle. All accessories connected
to the outlet(s) should be removed or turned off
when the vehicle is not in use to protect the
battery against discharge.
1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center
Console Bin / USB Port (Charge Only)
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Rear
Center Console
3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter
Instrument Panel
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will
discharge the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 115 or 230 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet
is located on the center stack of the instrument
panel, to the right of the radio. This outlet can
power cellular phones, electronics and other
low power devices requiring power up to 150
Watts. Certain video game consoles will exceed
this power limit, as will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter
shuts down. Once the electrical device has
been removed from the outlet, the inverter
should reset.
Power Inverter Outlet
To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the
device. The outlet automatically turns off when
the device is unplugged.
NOTE:
The power inverter will only turn on if the igni-
tion is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Due to built-in overload protection, the power
inverter will shut down if the power rating is
exceeded.
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED
There can be up to five auxiliary switches
located in the lower switch bank of the
instrument panel which can be used to power
various electronic devices and Power Take Off
(PTO) (if equipped). If PTO is equipped, it will
take the place of the fifth auxiliary switch.
Connections to the switches are found under
the hood in the connectors attached to the
auxiliary Power Distribution Center.
You have the ability to configure the
functionality of the auxiliary switches via the
instrument cluster display. All switches can now
be configured for setting the switch type
operation to latching or momentary, power
source of either battery or ignition, and ability to
hold last state across key cycles.
NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when
switch type is set to latching and power source
is set to ignition.
For further information on using the auxiliary
switches, please refer to the Ram Body
Builder’s Guide by accessing
www.rambodybuilder.com and choosing the
appropriate links.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED
The window controls on the driver's door control
all the door windows.
Power Window Switches
The passenger door windows can also be
operated by using the single window controls on
the passenger door trim panel. The window
controls will operate only when the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN position.
To open the window part way (manually), push
the window switch down briefly and release.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed
in the OFF position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power
window switches have an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch down for a short period
of time, then release, and the window will go
down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up for a short period of
time and release; the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then
go back down. Remove the obstacle and use
the window switch again to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the
switch lightly and hold to close the window
manually.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped
by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may
result in serious injury or death.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the
window completely and continue to hold
the switch up for an additional two seconds
after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open
the window completely and continue to hold
the switch down for an additional two
seconds after the window is fully open.
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH (FOUR
D
OOR MODELS ONLY)
The window lockout switch on the driver's door
trim panel allows you to disable the window
controls on the rear passenger doors. To
disable the window controls, push and release
the window lockout button. To enable the
window controls, push and release the window
lockout button again.
Window Lockout Switch
POWER SLIDING REAR WINDOW —
I
F EQUIPPED
The switch for the power sliding rear window is
located on the overhead console.
Rear Window Switch
Push the switch to the right to open the glass.
Pull the switch to the left to close the glass.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands,
fingers and all objects from the window path
before closing.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MANUAL SLIDING REAR WINDOW —
I
F EQUIPPED
A locking device in the center of the window
helps to prevent entry from the rear of the
vehicle. Squeeze the lock to release the
window.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
open the front and rear windows together to
minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located on the
overhead console between the courtesy/
reading lights.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second, the sunroof and sunshade will
open automatically and stop at the full open
position.
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position.
During Express Open or Express Close
operation, any other movement of the sunroof
switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward to full open.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch
in the forward position.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The
sunroof will remain in a partially opened
position until the switch is operated and held
again.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
closing of the sunroof during the Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if
this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
will disable and the sunroof must be closed in
Manual Mode.
VENTING SUNROOF
Push and release the Vent switch within one
half second and the sunroof will open to the
vent position. During Express Vent operation,
any other actuation of the sunroof switches will
stop the sunroof operation.
SUNSHADE OPERATION
The sunshade can be opened manually.
However, the sunshade will open automatically
as the sunroof opens.
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
IGNITION OFF OPERATION
The power sunroof switch will remain active for
up to approximately 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect system Ú page 166.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel. Periodically check for
and clear out any debris that may have
collected in the tracks.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HOOD
TO OPEN THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be
released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located below
the steering wheel at the base of the
instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center
of the hood and push the safety latch lever
to the left to release it, before raising the
hood.
Safety Latch Location
TO CLOSE THE HOOD
Hoods equipped with gas props are closed from
the point where the props no longer hold the
hood open.
TAILGATE
OPENING
To open the tailgate, lift up on the handle and
pull the tailgate down.
CLOSING
To close the tailgate, push it upward until both
sides are latched.
The tailgate can be locked using the key fob
lock button.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at
the front center of the hood to ensure that
both latches engage.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
TAILGATE REMOVAL
NOTE:
Removing the tailgate will disable the rearview
camera function.
To remove the tailgate, follow the instructions
below:
1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear
camera and or power locks (if equipped)
Ú
page 77.
2. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support
cables by releasing the lock tang from the
pivot.
NOTE:
Make sure tailgate is supported when removing
support cables.
Locking Tang
3. Position the tailgate on a 45° angle.
4. Raise the right side of the tailgate until the
right side pivot clears the hanger bracket.
5. Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free
the left side pivot.
6. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck
pickup box.
Disconnecting The Rear Camera And
Remote Keyless Entry
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear
camera or Remote Keyless Entry
connector bracket located on the rear sill.
Connector Bracket
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is
deadly, the exhaust system on vehicles
equipped with “Cap or Slide-In Campers”
should extend beyond the overhanging
camper compartment and be free of leaks.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove the connector bracket from the sill
by pushing inward on the locking tab.
Locking Tab
3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness,
ensuring the connector bracket does not
fall into the sill.
Disconnected Harness
4. Connect the chassis plug and bracket
(provided in the glove compartment) to the
chassis wiring harness and insert the
bracket back into the sill.
Chassis Wiring Harness
Chassis Plug
5. Connect the tailgate plug (provided in the
glove compartment) to the tailgate wiring
harness to ensure that the terminals do not
corrode.
Wire Harness Bracket
1 — Tailgate Plug Release
2 — Tailgate Plug
3 — Tailgate Harness
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
(Continued)
6. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket
against the forward-facing surface of the
tailgate. This will prevent damaging the
connector and bracket when storing or
reinstalling the tailgate.
Taped Tailgate Harness
PICKUP BOX
The pickup box has many features designed for
utility and convenience.
Pick Up Box Features
NOTE:
If you are installing a Toolbox, Ladder Rack or
Headache Rack at the front of the pickup box,
you must use Mopar Box Reinforcement Brackets
that are available from an authorized dealer.
You can carry wide building materials (sheets of
plywood, etc.) by building a raised load floor.
Place lumber across the box in the indentations
provided above the wheel housings and in the
bulkhead dividers to form the floor.
1 — Upper Load Floor Indents
2 — Bulk Head Dividers
3 — Cleats
WARNING!
The pickup box is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who
should sit in seats and use seat belts.
Care should always be exercised when oper-
ating a vehicle with unrestrained cargo.
Vehicle speeds may need to be reduced.
Severe turns or rough roads may cause
shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may
result in vehicle damage. If wide building
materials are to be frequently carried, the
installation of a support is recommended.
This will restrain the cargo and transfer the
load to the pickup box floor.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
There are stampings in the sheet metal on the
inner side bulkheads of the box in front of and
behind both wheel housings. Place wooden
boards across the box from side to side to
create separate load compartments in the
pickup box.
There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the
lower sides of the pickup box that can sustain
loads up to 1000 lbs (450 kg) total.
BED RAIL TIE-DOWN SYSTEM —
I
F EQUIPPED
NOTE:
This feature is available for vehicles both
equipped, or not equipped, with a RamBox.
There are two adjustable cleats on each side of
the bed that can be used to assist in securing
cargo.
Adjustable Cleats
Each cleat must be located and tightened down
in one of the detents, along either rail, in order
to keep cargo properly secure.
If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs
(272 kg) of material suspended above the
wheelhouse, supports must be installed to
transfer the weight of the load to the pickup
box floor or vehicle damage may result. The
use of proper supports will permit loading
up to the rated payload.
Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward
in an accident causing serious or fatal
injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not
exceed 250 lbs (113 kg) and the angle of
the load on each cleat should not exceed
45 degrees above horizontal, or damage to
the cleat or cleat rail may occur.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
To move the cleat to any position on the rail,
turn the nut counterclockwise, approximately
three turns. Then pull out on the cleat and slide
it to the detent nearest the desired location.
Make sure the cleat is seated in the detent and
tighten the nut.
Adjustable Cleat Assembly
Cleat Removal (Standard Box Rail)
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, slide
the cleat forward to access the cut out at the
end of the box rail, then remove the cleat.
Slide Cleat Forward To Remove
Cleat Removal (With Tonneau Cover)
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove
the end cap screw located in the center of the
end cap, using a #T30 Torx head driver.
Remove the end cap and slide the cleat off the
end of the rail.
End Cap Screw Location If Equipped With Tonneau
Cover
Cleat Removal (Without Tonneau Cover)
Remove the end cap by pushing upward on the
release button located beneath the end cap
while pulling the cap away from the rail. The
cleat can now be removed by sliding it off the
end of the rail.
1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
End Cap Release Button If Not Equipped With Tonneau
Cover
Pull End Cap Away From Rail
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED
The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box
storage and cargo management system
consisting of up to three features:
Integrated box side storage bins
Cargo extender/divider (if equipped)
Bed rail tie-down system (if equipped)
Ú page 80
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING RAMBOX
Push and release the lock or unlock button on
the key fob to lock and unlock all doors, the
tailgate and the RamBox Ú page 13. The
RamBox storage bins can be locked using the
vehicle key. To lock and unlock the storage bin,
insert the key into the keyhole on the push
button and turn clockwise to lock or
counterclockwise to unlock. Always return the
key to the upright (vertical) position before
removing the key from the push button.
CAUTION!
Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and
latched before moving or driving the
vehicle.
Loads applied to the top of the bin lid
should be minimized to prevent damage to
the lid and latching/hinging mechanisms.
Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due
to heavy/sharp objects placed in bin that
shift due to vehicle motion. In order to mini-
mize potential for damage, secure all cargo
to prevent movement and protect inside
surfaces of bin from heavy/sharp objects
with appropriate padding.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
RAMBOX CARGO STORAGE BINS
Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of
the pickup box. The cargo storage bins provide
watertight, lockable, illuminated storage for up
to 150 lbs (68 kg) of evenly distributed cargo.
RamBox Cargo Storage Bin
To open a storage bin with the RamBox
unlocked, push and release the button located
on the lid. The RamBox lid will open upward to
allow hand access. Lift the lid to fully open.
NOTE:
RamBox will not open when the button is
pushed if the RamBox is locked.
RamBox Pushbutton And Lock
The interior of the RamBox will automatically
illuminate when the lid is opened. In addition to
the automatic illumination, there is a manual
on/off switch located at the rear of each storage
bin. Pushing the switch once will turn off the bin
lights, pushing the switch again will turn the
lights back on.
RamBox Light Switch
Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs
(to allow water to drain from bins). To remove
plug, pull up on the edge. To install, push the
plug downward into drain hole.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the following items could
cause damage to the vehicle:
Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins
is properly secured.
Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 150 lb
(68 kg) per bin for 1500 series vehicles.
CAUTION!
Leaving the lid open for extended periods of
time could cause the vehicle battery to
discharge. If the lid is required to stay open
for extended periods of time, it is
recommended that the bin lights be turned
off manually using the on/off switch.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
RamBox Drain Plug Removal
NOTE:
Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo
dividers and shelf supports. These accessories
(in addition to other RamBox accessories) are
available from Mopar.
RAMBOX SAFETY WARNING
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
RamBox Emergency Release Lever
As a security measure, an Emergency Release
Lever is built into the storage bin cover latching
mechanism.
In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be
opened from inside of the bin by pulling on the
glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the storage
bin cover latching mechanism.
Emergency Release Lever
BED EXTENDER — IF EQUIPPED
The bed extender has three functional
positions:
Storage Position
Divider Position
Extender Position
Divider Position
The divider position is intended for managing
your cargo and assisting in keeping cargo from
moving around the bed. There are 11 divider
slots along the bed inner panels which allow for
various positions to assist in managing your
cargo.
WARNING!
Always close the storage bin covers when
your vehicle is unattended.
Do not allow children to have access to the
storage bins. Once in the storage bin, young
children may not be able to escape. If
trapped in the storage bin, children can die
from suffocation or heat stroke.
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
To install the bed extender into a divider
position, perform the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked
using the vehicle key and rotate the center
handle vertically to release the extender
side gates.
Center Handle And Lock
2. With the side gates open, position the
extender so the outboard ends align with
the intended slots in the sides of the bed.
Aligning Gate To Slots
3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the
outboard ends are secured into the
intended slots of the bed.
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to
secure the side gates in the closed position.
Side Gates Closed
5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel
into place.
Extender Position
The extender position allows you to load the bed
of the truck beyond the tailgate. The bed
extender will add an additional 15 inches (38
cm) in the back of the truck when additional
cargo room is needed. The extender position
utilizes a locating pin and rotating handle
located on both sides of the truck bed near the
tailgate.
Extender Position
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
3 — Unlocked Position
4 — Locked Position
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
To install the bed extender into the extender
position, perform the following:
1. Lower the tailgate.
2. Make sure the center handle is unlocked
and rotate the center handle vertically in
order to release the extender side gates.
3. Fit the end of the side gate ends onto the
pin and handle.
Extender Installation
4. Rotate the handles to the horizontal
position to secure into place.
Locking Tab
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of potential injury or
property damage:
Cargo must be secured.
Do not exceed cargo load rating of your
vehicle.
Secure all loads to truck utilizing cargo tie
downs.
Extender should not be used as cargo tie
down.
When vehicle is in motion do not exceed
150 lbs (68 kg) load on the tailgate.
The bed extender is not intended for off
road use.
When not in use, the extender/divider
should be in stowed or divider position with
the tailgate closed.
When in use all handles are to be in the
locked position.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
Storage Position
The storage position for the bed extender is at
the front of the truck bed which maximizes the
bed cargo area when not in use.
To install the bed divider into the storage
position, perform the same steps as you would
for the divider position, except position the
divider fully forward in the bed against the front
panel.
Storage Position
The outboard ends should be positioned in front
of the cargo tie-down loops.
Cargo Tie Down Loop
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS
CAMPER APPLICATIONS
Certain truck models are not recommended for
slide-in campers. To determine if your vehicle is
excluded, please refer to the “Consumer
Information Truck-Camper Loading” document
available online at ramtrucks.com. For safety
reasons, follow all instructions in this important
document.
NOTE:
When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a
vehicle, an alternate Center High-Mounted Stop
Light (CHMSL) must be provided.
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is
deadly, the exhaust system on vehicles
equipped with “Cap or Slide-In Campers”
should extend beyond the overhanging
camper compartment and be free of leaks.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED
The Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover can be installed on
the truck bed to protect your gear and cargo.
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER REMOVAL
To remove the Tonneau Cover, use the following
steps:
1. Open the tailgate to gain access to the rear
pair of Tonneau Cover clamps located on
the underside of the cover.
Location Of Rear Clamps
NOTE:
If clamp wire is damaged replace immediately.
2. Pull both clamp handles down to release
the Tonneau Cover’s rear panel.
Released Position
3. From the released position, send the
clamps to the Stowed Position by pushing
from the yellow bumper up.
Stowed Position
CAUTION!
Make sure the Tonneau Cover clamp and
clamp wire are in the proper stowed position.
If the clamp and clamp wire are not properly
stowed, damage to the Tonneau Cover
material will result.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
4. Fold the rear panel up onto the center panel
(intermediate position).
NOTE:
When folding the center and rear panels,
the sections MUST be held together to
avoid damage to the cover material.
Fold the panels gently. It is not recom-
mended to allow the panels to drop
under their own weight.
Folded Rear Panel (Intermediate Position)
NOTE:
The vehicle cannot be driven when the Tonneau
Cover is in this position.
5. Fold the rear and center panels up onto the
front panel (Tri-Folded position).
Tri-Folded Position
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together
6. Clip both stowage straps to prevent the
Tonneau Cover panels from unfolding.
NOTE:
Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been folded
completely, and the stowage straps are
engaged, before removing.
CAUTION!
The folded tonneau cover must be latched by
both front latches and both front stowage
straps or damage to the tonneau cover or
vehicle may occur.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Stowage Strap
7. Once in the Tri-Folded position, pull both
front clamp handles down to the Released
Position.
Released Position
8. From the Released Position, send the
clamps to the Stowed Position by pushing
from the yellow bumper up. Listen for a
“clicking” sound to confirm the clamp has
been properly stowed.
Stowed Position
9. With two people, remove the Tonneau
Cover.
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER
I
NSTALLATION
To install the Tonneau Cover, use the following
steps:
1. Position the folded Tonneau Cover on the
pickup box and push the cover forward
against the front of the pickup box. The
Tonneau Cover centers itself when placed
on the vehicle.
NOTE:
Make sure to always push the Tonneau Cover
all the way forward on the pickup box. Failure to
do so might prevent proper clamp engagement,
or interfere with the tailgate auto drop function
(if equipped).
Location Of Front Clamps
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
2. Pull down on the first set of clamp handles
to release the clamps from the stowed
position.
Stowed Position
3. Push clamp wires up and under the flange
of the box (or flange of the Ram Box rail, if
equipped) to the semi clamped position.
Semi Clamped Position
4. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped
position to properly engage the clamps.
Clamped Position
NOTE:
Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not
improperly attached to the truck bed flange.
Improper Clamp Position
5. Disengage the stowage straps.
6. Unfold the center and rear panels to the
intermediate position.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Intermediate Position (Vehicle Cannot Be Driven)
NOTE:
When folding the center and rear panels, the
sections MUST be held together to avoid
damage to the cover material.
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together
7. Completely unfold the Tonneau Cover.
Fully Unfolded Position
8. Pull the rear clamp handles down into the
released position.
Stowed Position
9. Push clamp wires up and under the flange
of box (or flange of Ram Box rail, if
equipped) to the semi clamped position.
Semi Clamped Position
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
10. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped
position to properly engage the clamps.
Clamped Position
Improper Clamp Position
NOTE:
Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not
partially clamped to the truck bed flange.
The Tonneau Cover clamps can be locked when
in the clamped position by placing a lock
through the locking hole.
Locking Hole
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER CLEANING
For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover, use
Mopar Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and Mopar
Leather & Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.
CAUTION!
It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure the
Tonneau Cover is properly installed on the
vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure can
result in detachment of the Tonneau Cover
from the vehicle and/or damage to the
vehicle/Tonneau Cover.
2
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Clusters
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 98.
Base Instrument Cluster Display
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the
engine cooling system is operating satis-
factorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather,
up mountain grades, or when towing a
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
5. Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in
the fuel tank when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the vehicle where
the fuel door is located.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. It is recommended to call
an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats Ú page 305.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H,” turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
3
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Premium Instrument Clusters
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Voltmeter
When the engine is running, the gauge
indicates the electrical system voltage.
The pointer should stay within the normal
range if the battery is charged. If the
pointer moves to either extreme left or
right and remains there during normal
driving, the electrical system should be
serviced.
NOTE:
The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at
various engine temperatures. This cycling oper-
ation is caused by the post-heat cycle of the
intake manifold heater system. The number of
cycles and the length of the cycling operation is
controlled by the engine control module.
Post-heat operation can run for several
minutes, and then the electrical system and
voltmeter needle will stabilize.
3. Oil Pressure Gauge
The pointer should always indicate some
oil pressure when the engine is running.
A continuous high or low reading under
normal driving conditions may indicate a
lubrication system malfunction. Imme-
diate service should be obtained from an
authorized dealer.
4. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
5. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the
engine cooling system is operating satis-
factorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather,
up mountain grades, or when towing a
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
6. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 98.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. It is recommended to call
an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats Ú page 305.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H,” turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
3
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
7. Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in
the fuel tank when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the vehicle where
the fuel door is located.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information
to the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode,
opening/closing of a door will activate the
display for viewing, and display the total miles,
or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and
features. Using a driver interactive display
located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show how the
systems are working and give warnings when
they are not. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through the main
menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make
selections and adjustments.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
C
ONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
Base Instrument Cluster Display
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display menu items may
consist of the following:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Fuel Economy Info
Trip A
Trip B
Audio
Trailer Tow
Stored Messages
Screen Setup
Vehicle Settings (Not equipped with a
Uconnect touchscreen radio)
The system allows the driver to select
information by pushing the following instrument
cluster display control buttons located on the
left side of the steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to
scroll upward through the main menu items,
submenu screen, and vehicle settings.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button
to scroll downward through the main menu
items, submenu screen, and vehicle settings.
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to
access/select the information screens or
submenu screens of a main menu item. Push
and hold the right arrow button for two
seconds to reset displayed/selected features
that can be reset.
Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to
access/select the information screens,
submenu screens of a main menu item, or to
return to the main menu.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
3
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
OIL LIFE RESET
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display in the
instrument cluster display after a single chime
has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator
system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
dependent upon your personal driving style.
NOTE:
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster
display controls for the following procedure(s).
Vehicles Equipped With Passive Entry
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button
to scroll downward through the main menu
to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button
to access the ”Vehicle Info” screen, then
scroll up or down to select “Oil Life.”
4. Push and hold the right arrow button to
select “Reset”.
5. Push and release the down arrow button
to select “Yes,” then push and release the
right arrow button to reset the Oil Life to
100%.
6. Push and release the up arrow button to
exit the instrument cluster display screen.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Passive Entry
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, cycle the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button
to scroll downward through the main menu
to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button
to access the “Vehicle Info” screen then
scroll up or down to select “Oil Life.”
4. Push and hold the right arrow button to
select “YES” by pushing the right arrow
then push and release the right arrow
button to select reset of the Oil Life to
100%.
5. Push and release the up arrow button to
exit the instrument cluster display screen.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the Oil Life indicator system
did not reset. If necessary, repeat this proce-
dure.
DISPLAY MENU ITEMS
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the desired selectable menu icon is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the speedometer menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the right arrow button to
cycle the display between mph and km/h.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Vehicle Info menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the right arrow button to
enter the submenus items of Vehicle Info.
Follow the directional prompts to access or
reset any of the following Vehicle Info submenu
items:
Tire Pressure
Transmission Temperature (Automatic only)
Oil Temperature
Oil Life
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Battery Voltage — If Equipped
Gauge Summary — If Equipped
Engine Hours
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Fuel Economy menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and Hold the right arrow button to reset
Average Fuel Economy.
Current Fuel Economy Gauge
Average Fuel Economy Value
Range To Empty
Trip A / Trip B
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip menu item is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the right arrow button to enter the
submenus of Trip A and Trip B. The Trip A or Trip
B information will display the following:
Distance
Average MPG
Average MPH
Elapsed Time
Push and hold the right arrow button to reset
all information.
Trailer Tow
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trailer Tow menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the right arrow button and
the next screen will display the following trailer
trip information:
Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold
the right arrow button to reset the
distance.
Trailer Brake
Output
Type
Gain
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Audio display icon is highlighted
in the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the right arrow button to display the
active source.
3
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Messages Menu item is
highlighted. This feature shows the number of
stored warning messages. Pushing the right
arrow button will allow you to see what the
stored messages are.
When no messages are present, the main menu
icon will be a closed envelope.
Screen Setup Menu Item
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Screen Setup menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the right arrow button to
enter the Screen Setup submenu. The Screen
Setup feature allows you to change what
information is displayed in the instrument
cluster as well as the location that information
is displayed.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average MPG
Current MPG
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip
Trailer Brake Gain
Upper Right
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average MPG
Current MPG
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip
Trailer Brake Gain
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
Lower Left
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average MPG
Current MPG
Trailer Brake Gain
Lower Right
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average MPG
Current MPG
Trailer Brake Gain
Upper and Lower Gauge
None
Trans Temp
Oil Temp
Oil Life
Current MPG
Trailer Brake
Odometer
No Decimals
Decimals
Restore Defaults
Cancel
Ok
Settings — If Equipped
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and
recall features when the transmission is in
PARK (P).
Push and release the up and down arrow
buttons until Settings displays in the instrument
cluster display.
Follow the prompts to display and set any of the
following Vehicle Settings.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following
settings.
If equipped with a base radio (Non-Touch-
screen), the Vehicle Settings will be included
in the instrument cluster display.
If equipped with a Touchscreen radio, the
Vehicle Settings will be included in the radio
head unit.
3
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated
(Left Submenu Layer)
Submenus (Right Submenu Layer)
1 Language Select Language
English, Spanish, French, Italian, German, Dutch, Portuguese, Arabic
(If Equipped)
2 Units Units US.; Metric
3 ParkSense ParkSense
Notification — Sound Only; Sound & Display
Front Volume — Low; Medium; High
Rear Volume — Low; Medium; High
4 Tilt Mirror in Reverse Tilt Mirror in R On; Off
5 Rain Sensing Wipers Auto Wipers On; Off
6 Hill Start Assist Hill Start Assist On; Off
7 Headlights Off Delay Lights Off Delay 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
8 Illuminated Approach Lights w/ Unlock 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
9 Headlights On with Wipers Lights w/ Wipers On; Off
10 Automatic High Beams Auto High Beams On; Off
11 Flash Lights with Lock Lights w/ Lock On; Off
12 Auto Lock Doors Auto Lock Doors On; Off
13 Auto Unlock Doors Auto Unlock Doors On; Off
14
Sound Horn with Remote
Start
Horn w/ Remote Start On; Off
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
15
Sound Horn with Remote
Lock
Horn w/ Remote Lock Off; 1st Press; 2nd Press
16 Remote Unlock Sequence Remote Unlock Driver Door; All Doors
17 Key Fob Linked to Memory Key in Memory On; Off
18 Passive Entry Passive Entry On; Off
19
Remote Start Comfort
System
Remote Start Comfort Off; Remote Start; All starts
20 Easy Exit Seat Easy Exit Seat On; Off
21 Key-off Power Delay Power Off Delay Off; 45 seconds; 5 minutes; 10 minutes
22 Commercial Settings Commercial
Aux Switches
Power Take-Off
PIN Setup
NOTE:
If the vehicle’s PIN is forgotten or not known, see an authorized dealer
to have the PIN reset.
23 Trailer Select Trailer Select Trailer 1; Trailer 2; Trailer 3; Trailer 4
24 Brake Type Brake Type Light Electric; Heavy Electric; Light EOH; Heavy EOH
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated
(Left Submenu Layer)
Submenus (Right Submenu Layer)
3
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
25 Trailer Name Trailer Name
Trailer # (# is equal to slot position)
Boat
Car
Cargo
Dump
Equipment
Flatbed
Gooseneck
Horse
Livestock
Motorcycle
Snowmobile
Travel
Utility
5th Wheel
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated
(Left Submenu Layer)
Submenus (Right Submenu Layer)
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
Turn Menu Off — If Equipped
Push and release the right arrow button to
exit the main menu.
Push and release any instrument cluster display
control button to enter the instrument cluster
display main menu again.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional
monitoring of the electrical system and status
of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will
take place to extend the driving time and distance
of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or
turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a
risk of battery depletion to the point where the
vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply,
or will not restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will
appear in the instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery
has a low state of charge and continues to lose
electrical charge at a rate that the charging
system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from
load reduction. The charging system
performs a diagnostic on the charging
system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it
may indicate a problem with the charging
system. Refer to “Battery Charge Warning
Light” in this chapter for further information.
26 Compass Variance Compass Var 1-15 increments of 1
27 Calibrate Compass Compass Cal Cancel; Calibrate
28 Fuel Saver Display Fuel Saver On; Off
29
Park Assist Front Chime
Volume
Park Assist Front Chime
Volume
On; Off
30
Park Assist Rear Chime
Volume
Park Assist Rear Chime Volume On; Off
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated
(Left Submenu Layer)
Submenus (Right Submenu Layer)
3
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volt AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system
because the electrical loads are larger than
the capability of the charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical
loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and
interior lights, overloaded power outlets
+12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB ports) during
certain driving conditions (city driving,
towing, frequent stopping, etc.).
Installing options like additional lights,
upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated
by long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended
period of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was
not charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical
load left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volts portable appli-
ances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles
and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On”
or “Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if
possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior)
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and
review specifications if any (load and Ignition
Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecutive
trips, and if the evaluation and driving pattern
of the vehicle did not help to identify the cause.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when
applicable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and must not be considered as
exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all
cases. Always refer to the information in this
chapter in the event of a failure indication. All
active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different
based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will
turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound
Ú page 221.
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and
will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
If the light is either not on during startup, stays
on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a
problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
3
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
Vehicle Security System is arming,
and then will flash slowly until the
vehicle is disarmed.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too
high, this indicator will illuminate and
a single chime will sound. If the temperature
reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will
sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C)
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the
vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
return to normal, turn the engine off immediately
and call for service
Ú
page 279.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If
it stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the ETC
system. If a problem is detected while
the vehicle is running, the light will
either stay on or flash depending on the nature
of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the
vehicle is safely and completely stopped and
the transmission is placed in the PARK (P)
position. The light should turn off. If the light
remains on with the vehicle running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the EPS system
Ú page 134.
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the Trailer Brake has been
disconnected Ú page 146.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a
door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single
chime.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an
Onboard Diagnostic System called
OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
3
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the bulb does not come on when turning the
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when
the ESC system is Active. The ESC
Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position, and when ESC is activated. It should go
out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator
Light comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the
ESC system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC
is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/
RUN or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be
on, even if it was turned off previously.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the windshield washer fluid is low
Ú page 292.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This
could result in death or serious injury to the
driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage
to the vehicle control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability. If the
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
Low Coolant Level Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
vehicle coolant level is low
Ú page 303.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the fuel filler cap is loose. Properly
close the filler cap to disengage the
light. If the light does not turn off,
please see an authorized dealer.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires is significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair
kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
3
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS.
The light will turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and may stay on for as
long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is
required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning
Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, have the brake system inspected
by an authorized dealer.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal
a fault with the 4WD system. If the light
stays on or comes on during driving, it
means that the 4WD system is not
functioning properly and that service is required. We
recommend you drive to the nearest service center
and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the
transmission fluid temperature is
running hot. This may occur with
severe usage, such as trailer towing. If
this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into PARK
(P) and run the engine at idle or slightly higher
until the light turns off.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle.
Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire
sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L) this
light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when TOW/HAUL mode is selected
Ú page 124.
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate when Trailer Merge Assist
has been activated Ú page 146.
Cargo Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cargo light is activated by
pushing the cargo light button on the
headlight switch.
4WD Lock Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOCK
mode. The front and rear driveshafts
are mechanically locked together,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed Ú page 131.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW
mode. The front and rear driveshafts
are mechanically locked together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at
the wheels Ú page 131.
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive
mode, and the front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed.
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
4WD power transfer case is in the
NEUTRAL mode and the front and rear
driveshafts are disengaged from the
powertrain.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the park lights or headlights are
turned on Ú page 45.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front fog lights are on
Ú page 45.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal
lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated
when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
3
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
If Equipped With 7 Inch Instrument Cluster
Display
This light will turn on when the cruise
control is set Ú page 134.
4WD AUTO Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive auto
mode, and the front axle is engaged,
but the vehicle's power is sent to the
rear wheels. Four-wheel drive will be
automatically engaged when the vehicle senses
a loss of traction Ú page 131.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Stop/Start function is in
“Autostop” mode.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Ready Indicator
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Cruise Control is ready, but
not set Ú page 134.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
If Equipped With 3.5 Inch Instrument
Cluster Display
This light will turn on when the cruise
control is set Ú page 134.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam
headlights are on. With the low beams
activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary
high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117
If any of these systems require service, the OBD
II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes
and other information to assist your service
technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may
need to access this information to assist with
the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system Ú page 165.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass could
prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
3
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will
remain fully illuminated until you place
the ignition in the off position or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation you should
have your vehicle serviced before going to the
I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
119
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
fasten your seat belt.
The starter should not be operated for more
than 10-second intervals. Waiting a few
seconds between such intervals will protect the
starter from overheating.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Start the engine with the transmission in the
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting
into any driving range.
NOTE:
This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal
must be pressed to shift out of PARK.
Starting the vehicle in NEUTRAL is not
possible unless the Manual Park Release has
been activated Ú page 280.
TIP START FEATURE
Do not press the accelerator. Place the ignition
switch briefly to the START position and release
it. The starter motor will continue to run and will
automatically disengage when the engine is
running.
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK should the
situations on the following pages occur. It is a
back up system and should not be relied upon
as the primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in the OFF
mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
The conditions under which AutoPark will
engage are outlined on the following pages.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns
off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary gear
selector and an eight-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, the
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will
change to ACC mode. After 30 minutes the igni-
tion switches to OFF automatically, unless the
driver turns the ignition switch OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits
the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary gear
selector and an eight-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then
Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument
cluster.
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to
place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A
VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK
by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is
indicated in the instrument cluster display
and near the gear selector. If the "P" indi-
cator is blinking, your vehicle is not in
PARK. As an added precaution, always
apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system
and should not be relied upon as the
primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
(Continued)
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster, causing the
“AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to Gear”
to not be seen. In these cases, the gear selector
must be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed
is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to
Shift to P” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h).
4WD LOW — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
vehicle in 4WD LOW.
The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given
when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is ajar
Vehicle is in 4WD LOW range
The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
chime will continue until you shift the vehicle
into PARK or the driver’s door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle
is in PARK by looking for the "P" in the
instrument cluster display and near the gear
selector. As an added precaution, always apply
the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have
followed the “Normal Starting” procedure, it
may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it there while the
engine is cranking. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run
for 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the
brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h),
the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until
the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL
position can roll. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in a flash fire causing serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto-
matic transmission cannot be started this
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started,
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
4
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to
run, but not have enough power to continue
running when the ignition key is released. If this
occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator
pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release
the accelerator pedal and the ignition key once
the engine is running smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after a 10
second period of engine cranking with the
accelerator pedal held to the floor, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(B
ELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these
temperatures, the use of an externally powered
electric engine block heater (available from an
authorized dealer) is recommended.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and
it will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect
the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC
electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire
extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under
the hood on the passenger side of the vehicle
near the right head lamp assembly. It is located
between the front grill and the radiator, but
underneath the black upper seal.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate conditions under which vehicle operations
will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
quality grades
Ú
page 353.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 276.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at
a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying
again.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
(Continued)
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
Please check your oil level with the engine oil
indicator often during the break in period. Add
oil as required.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK.
The foot operated parking brake is located
below the lower left corner of the instrument
panel. To apply the parking brake, firmly push
the parking brake pedal fully. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release
handle.
Parking Brake Release
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake
Warning Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is
detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before
attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. Apply the parking brake before placing
the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make
it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally
injured.
4
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave
the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so
may cause the vehicle to roll and cause
damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake
system malfunction is indicated. Have the
brake system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, turn the engine off,
and remove the key fob. When the ignition
is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal) position,
(or, with Keyless Enter-N-Go, when the igni-
tion is in the OFF mode) the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
KEY IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK —
I
F EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position. The key fob
can only be removed from the ignition when the
ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, and the
transmission is locked in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position.
NOTE:
If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key fob in the ignition to warn you that this
safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be
started and stopped but the key fob cannot be
removed until you obtain service.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be
turned to the ON/RUN mode (engine running,
for vehicles with eight-speed transmission) and
the brake pedal must be pressed.
In eight-speed vehicles, the brake pedal must
also be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into
DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped
or moving at low speeds.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before exiting the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition (in a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go)
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
4
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
EIGHT-SPEED AUTOMATIC
T
RANSMISSION
The transmission is controlled using a rotary
electronic gear selector located on the
instrument panel. The transmission gear range
(PRND) is displayed both above the gear
selector and in the instrument cluster. To select
a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector.
You must press the brake pedal to shift the
transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when
the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds).
To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such
as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear
selector to the appropriate detent. Select the
DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects PARK while
driving), the position indicator will blink continu-
ously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs,
along with environmental and road conditions.
The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on
a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is
a normal condition, and precision shifts will
develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions.
Manual downshifts can be made using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control.
Pressing the GEAR-/GEAR+ switches (on the
steering wheel) while in the DRIVE position will
select the highest available transmission gear,
and will display that gear limit in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc Ú page 130. Some
models will display both the selected gear limit,
and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode.
Electronic Transmission Gear Selector
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when
shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
(Continued)(Continued)
(Continued)
When parking on a level surface, you may shift
the transmission into PARK first, and then apply
the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward
the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the key fob.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before exiting the
vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, turn the engine
OFF, and remove the key fob. When the
ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position (or, with Keyless Enter-N-Go, when
the ignition is in the OFF mode), the trans-
mission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position, and is not blinking.
With brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running.
Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition (in a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go)
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must start the
engine, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a
collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 158.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 283.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating
conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds, or while towing
a heavy trailer), select TOW/HAUL mode or use
the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control
to select a lower gear range Ú page 130. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear range will
improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F
[-30°C] or below), transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and
transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a
suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored
electronically for abnormal conditions. If a
condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, Transmission Limp
Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in certain gears,
or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may
be severely degraded and the engine may stall.
In some situations, the transmission may not
re-engage if the engine is turned off and
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. A message in the
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the
more serious conditions, and indicate what
actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage
after engine shutdown, perform this procedure
only in a desired location (preferably, at an
authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if
possible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL.
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. On
vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go, push and
hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
4
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control
allows the driver to limit the highest available
gear when the transmission is in DRIVE. For
example, if you set the transmission gear limit
to 4 (FOURTH gear), the transmission will not
shift above FOURTH gear (except to prevent
engine overspeed), but will shift through the
lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at
any vehicle speed. When the transmission gear
selector is in DRIVE, the transmission will operate
automatically, shifting between all available
gears. Tapping the GEAR - switch (on the steering
wheel) will activate ERS mode, display the
current gear in the instrument cluster, and set
that gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS
mode, tapping the GEAR - or GEAR + switch will
change the top available gear.
Electronic Range Select (ERS)
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the
GEAR + switch until the gear limit display
disappears from the instrument cluster.
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer,
carrying a heavy load, etc., and frequent
transmission shifting occurs, push the TOW/
HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL mode. This
will improve performance and reduce the
potential for transmission overheating or failure
due to excessive shifting.
TOW/HAUL Switch
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in
the instrument cluster and a light on the switch to
indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has been
activated. Pushing the switch a second time
restores normal operation. Normal operation is
always the default at engine start-up. If TOW/
HAUL mode is desired, the switch must be
pushed each time the engine is started.
1 — GEAR - Switch
2 — GEAR + Switch
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle
could skid, causing a collision or personal
injury.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
(Continued)
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED
FOUR-POSITION ELECTRONICALLY
S
HIFTED TRANSFER CASE
This is an electronically shifted transfer case
and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch
(Transfer Case Switch), which is located on the
instrument panel.
Four-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case
This electronically shifted transfer case
provides four mode positions:
Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD) — This
range is for normal street and highway
driving on dry hard surfaced roads. Driving
the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel
economy benefits as the front axle is not
engaged in 2WD.
Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH) —
This range provides torque to the front drive-
shaft (engages four-wheel drive) which allows
front and rear wheels to spin at the same
speed. This provides additional traction for
loose or slippery road surfaces only.
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW) —
This range provides low speed four-wheel
drive. It maximizes torque (increased torque
over 4WD HIGH) to the front driveshaft;
allowing front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional
traction and maximum pulling power for
loose or slippery road surfaces only. Do not
exceed 25 mph (40 km/h) in this range.
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the power-
train. To be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle Ú page 158.
WARNING!
Do not use the TOW/HAUL feature when
driving in icy or slippery conditions. The
increased engine braking can cause the rear
wheels to slide, and the vehicle to swing
around with the possible loss of vehicle
control, which may cause an accident
possibly resulting in personal injury or death.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the N (Neutral) position
without first fully engaging the parking brake.
The transfer case N (Neutral) position disen-
gages both the front and rear drive shaft
from the powertrain, and will allow the
vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in
PARK. The parking brake should always be
applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
4
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW
positions on dry, hard surfaced roads may
cause increased tire wear and damage to the
driveline components.
The transfer case N (Neutral) button is
located in the center of the 4WD Control
Switch and is pushed by using a ballpoint pen
or similar object. The transfer case N
(Neutral) position is to be used for recre-
ational towing only Ú page 158.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
(4WD and 4LOW) are located in the instrument
cluster and indicate the current and desired
transfer case selection. When you select a
different transfer case position, the indicator
lights will do the following:
If all of the following shift conditions are met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn off.
2. The selected position indicator light will
flash until the transfer case completes the
shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator
light for the selected position will stop
flashing and remain on.
If the transfer case does not shift into the
desired position, one or more of the following
events may occur:
1. The indicator light for the current position
will remain on.
2. The newly selected position indicator light
will continue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE:
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new
transfer case position have been met. To retry
the selection, push the current position, wait
five seconds, and retry selection.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the
electronically shifted transfer case. If this light
remains on after engine start up or illuminates
during driving, it means that the four-wheel
drive system is not functioning properly and that
service is required.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. This could
cause damage to driveline components.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to
a complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when
powering down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD
Warning Light” is illuminated. Not engaging
the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll
which may cause personal injury or death.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of
the 2WD, 4WD or 4WD LOCK positions at a given
road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in
tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the
transfer case will not shift. The position indi-
cator light for the previous position will
remain on and the newly selected position
indicator light will continue to flash until all
the requirements for the selected position
have been met.
If all the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have been met, the
current position indicator light will turn off,
the selected position indicator light will flash
until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indi-
cator light for the selected position will stop
flashing and remain on.
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
The limited-slip differential provides additional
traction on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel,
particularly when there is a difference between
the traction characteristics of the surface under
the right and left rear wheels. During normal
driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit
performs similarly to a conventional differential.
On slippery surfaces, however, the differential
delivers more of the driving effort to the rear
wheel having the better traction.
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful
during slippery driving conditions. With both
rear wheels on a slippery surface, a slight
application of the accelerator will supply
maximum traction. When starting with only one
rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface,
slight momentary application of the parking
brake may be necessary to gain maximum
traction.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden
accelerations when both rear wheels are on a
slippery surface. This could cause both rear
wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to slide
sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in
a turn.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip
differential never run the engine with one rear
wheel off the ground since the vehicle may
drive through the rear wheel remaining on the
ground. You could lose control of the vehicle.
4
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — 5.7L ENGINES
ONLY (IF EQUIPPED)
This feature offers improved fuel economy by
shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders
during light load and cruise conditions. The
system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of
maneuverability. The power steering system
adapts to different driving conditions.
If the steering icon is flashing, it indicates that
the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power
steering assistance.
If the steering icon is displayed and the “POWER
STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is
displayed on the instrument cluster screen, this
indicates an over temperature condition in the
power steering system. Once driving conditions
are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a
few moments until the icon and message turn
off Ú page 98.
If the steering icon is displayed and the
“SERVICE POWER STEERING – ASSIST OFF”
message is displayed the instrument cluster
screen, this indicates the vehicle needs to be
taken to the dealer for service Ú page 98.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer
the vehicle. Under these conditions there will
be a substantial increase in steering effort,
especially at low speeds and during parking
maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with the Cruise Control
system for cruising at a constant preset speed.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (32 km/h) or 25 mph (40 km/h),
depending on the powertrain.
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
1 — On/Off
2 — CANCEL
3 — RES (+)
4 — SET (-)
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Cruise
Control system has been designed to shut down
if multiple Cruise Control functions are operated
at the same time. If this occurs, the Cruise
Control system can be reactivated by pushing
the Cruise Control on/off button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate Cruise
Control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the
instrument cluster display will illuminate. To
turn the system off, push the on/off button a
second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will
turn off. The system should be turned off when
not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pushing the
SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the RES (+) button, or
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the RES (+) or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the RES (+) or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
4
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Cruise Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. On steep hills, a
greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may
be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the
RES (+) button and release. Resume can be
used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure will deactivate
the Cruise Control system without erasing the
set speed from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the
Cruise Control without erasing the set speed
from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition
in the OFF position erases the set speed from
memory.
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear and/or front fascia/bumper
and a detected obstacle when backing up or
moving forward (e.g. during a parking
maneuver).
For limitations of this system and usage
precautions, see Ú page 141.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is
enabled while in one of these gears, the system
will remain active until the vehicle speed is
increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. A warning will appear in the instrument
cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is
above ParkSense operating speed while in
REVERSE. The system will become active again
if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less
than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 18 inches (45 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending
on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front
fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending
on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected from
within the Uconnect system Ú page 166.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display Ú page 98. It
provides visual warnings to indicate the
distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/
or front fascia/bumper and the detected
obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the
system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE
or DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right rear
regions based on the obstacle’s distance and
location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single arc in
the corresponding left and/or right rear region
and the system will produce a tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to
the vehicle and the tone will change from a
single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
continuous.
4
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — Single 1/2 Second Tone 6 — Fast Tone
2 — Slow Tone 7 — Fast Tone
3 — Fast Tone 8 — Slow Tone
4 — Continuous Tone 9 — Slow Tone
5 — Continuous Tone 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following charts show the warning alert
operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30cm)
Audible Alert
(Chime)
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert (Chime) None
Single 1/2 Second
Tone (for rear only)
Slow (for rear only) Fast Continuous
Arcs None 1st Solid 2nd Solid 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No Yes Yes Yes Yes
4
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately three
seconds when an obstacle has been detected,
the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is
applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 166.
ENABLING AND DISABLING FRONT
A
ND/OR REAR PARKSENSE
Front ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the Front ParkSense switch.
Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the Rear ParkSense switch.
When the Front or Rear ParkSense
switch is pushed to disable the
system, the instrument cluster display
will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for approximately five seconds.
NOTE:
Arc alerts from the enabled ParkSense system,
will interrupt the five second messages, and the
instrument cluster display will show the vehicle
graphic with the corresponding arcs and "OFF"
message.
The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be
on when Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or
requires service. The Front or Rear ParkSense
switch LED will be off when the Front or Rear
system is enabled. If the Front or Rear
ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system
requires service, the Front or Rear ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the
LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
system has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message
for five seconds. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster display will display a "WIPE OFF"
message on the corresponding blocked system
while the vehicle is in REVERSE. The system will
continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is
functioning properly.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
cluster display make sure the outer surface and
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstructions and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear, see an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Water from a car wash or road slush in freezing
weather may also block the sensors.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument
cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
(Continued)
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascias/
bumpers are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and
debris to keep the ParkSense system oper-
ating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
When you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off,
the instrument cluster display will show a
vehicle graphic of the Front or Rear Park-
Sense on/off state for two seconds. Further-
more, once you turn Front or Rear ParkSense
off, it remains off until you turn it on again,
even if you cycle the ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and Front or Rear Park-
Sense is turned off, the instrument cluster
display will show a vehicle graphic with "OFF"
in the corresponding side. This vehicle
graphic will be displayed for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind or in front of the
fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-
Sense system off if obstacles such as bicycle
carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed near
the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close
obstacle as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be appear in the
instrument cluster display.
ParkSense should be disabled when the tail-
gate is in the lowered or open position. A
lowered tailgate could provide a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle
and could also cause a false braking event.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
4
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you
to see an on-screen image of the rear
surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio screen along with a
caution note to “Check Entire Surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds
this note will disappear. The ParkView Camera
is located in the center of the tailgate handle.
NOTE:
Removing the tailgate will disable the rearview
camera function.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View
Camera:
1. Press the "Controls" button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the "Back Up Camera" icon to turn the
Rear View Camera system on.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has
programmable modes of operation that may
be selected through the Uconnect system
Ú page 166.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with Camera delay turned off), the rear Camera
mode is exited and the navigation or audio
screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with Camera delay turned on), the rear Camera
image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds
unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted
into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly be disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the vehicle sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
WARNING! (Continued)
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is
activated through the "Backup Camera" button
in the "Controls" menu, a display timer for the
image is initiated. The image will continue to be
displayed until the display timer exceeds 10
seconds and the vehicle speed is above 8 mph
(13 km/h) or the touchscreen button "X" to
disable the display of the Rear View Camera
image is pressed.
A touchscreen button "X" to disable display of
the camera image is made available when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE gear.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle
and its projected backup path based on the
steering wheel position. The active guidelines
will show separate zones that will help indicate
the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
Zones
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
4
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The fuel filler cap (gas cap) is located behind the
fuel filler door, on the left side of the vehicle.
Open the fuel door and remove the fuel cap by
turning it counter-clockwise.
Fuel Filler Cap
NOTE:
When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the gas cap
is tightened properly. The MIL in the instru-
ment cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not
secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap
is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the gas cap is
removed or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the
engine is running.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into
a portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
gas containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emissions
control system could result from using an
improper fuel tank filler tube cap.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impu-
rities into the fuel system.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling. When the
fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
WARNING!
Always place container on the ground
before filling.
Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the
container when you are filling it.
Use only approved containers for flam-
mable liquid.
Do not leave container unattended while
filling.
A static electric charge could cause a spark
and fire hazard.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP MESSAGE
If the vehicle diagnostic system
determines that the fuel filler cap is
loose, improperly installed, or
damaged, a loose gASCAP indicator
will display in the instrument cluster telltale
display area Ú page 98. Tighten the fuel filler
cap properly and push the RIGHT button to turn
off the message. If the problem continues, the
message will appear the next time the vehicle is
started.
VEHICLE LOADING
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING
(GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Total load must be
limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are
not exceeded.
PAYLOAD
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the
allowable load weight a truck can carry,
including the weight of the driver, all
passengers, options and cargo.
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on
the front and rear axles. The load must be
distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR
of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the
components in the system with the lowest load
carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components
sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability does not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
TIRE SIZE
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
RIM SIZE
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
INFLATION PRESSURE
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full
GAWR.
CURB WEIGHT
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids,
including vehicle fuel, at full capacity
conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your
vehicle on a commercial scale before any
occupants or cargo are added.
LOADING
The actual total weight and the weight of the
front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can
best be determined by weighing it when it is
loaded and ready for operation.
4
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has
not been exceeded. The weight on the front and
rear of the vehicle should then be determined
separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR
of either the front or rear axles has been
exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met.
Store the heavier items down low and be sure
that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all
loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers
and handles and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
towing a trailer, carefully review this information
to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be
limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR
Ú page 145.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR.
If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles.
This could cause you to lose control. Also
overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, consumables and
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in
or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for
operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in
combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR
Ú page 145.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height
multiplied by the maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link
that can be installed between the hitch receiver
and the trailer tongue that typically provides
adjustable friction associated with the
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted
trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine
power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs
(2,267 kg) or more, it is recommended to
use a weight-distributing hitch to ensure
stable handling of your vehicle. If you use a
standard weight-carrying hitch, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause a
collision.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
4
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are commonly
used to tow small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions,
it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control, thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a
friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. Trailer sway control and a weight
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with
GAWR requirements.
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted weight distributing
hitch system may reduce handling, stability
and braking performance and could result
in a collision.
Weight distributing systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
Recommended Distribution Hitch Adjustment
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to
the trailer (do not connect the trailer).
2. Measure the height of the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to ground, this
is height H1.
Measuring Height (H)
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the
weight distribution bars connected.
4. Measure the height of the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to ground, this
is height H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight
distributing bars per the manufacturers’
recommendations so that the height of the
front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/
2+H1 (about 1/2 the difference between
H2 and H1 above normal ride height [H1]).
6. Perform a visual inspection of the trailer
and weight distributing hitch to confirm
manufacturers’ recommendations have
been met.
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
with TOW/HAUL mode engaged.
Measurement
Example
Example Height
(mm)
H1 1030
H2 1058
H2-H1 28
(H2-H1)/2 14
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1044
4
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH TYPE AND MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight a given factory equipped trailer hitch type can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting
the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight
Hitch Type Max. Trailer Weight / Max. Tongue Weight
Class III Bumper Hitch 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg) / 500 lbs (226 kg)
Class IV 10,710 lbs (4,858 kg) / 1,070 lbs (485 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM
T
RAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
NOTE:
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer
weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
ramtruck.ca (Canada)
rambodybuilder.com
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options or
dealer-installed options must be considered as
part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to
the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in Scheduled
Servicing, for the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 286. When towing a trailer, never
exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
4
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h)
when towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
and GAWR limits.
For further information Ú page 329.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow
these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be diffi-
cult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
loading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used
between your vehicle and trailer. Always
connect the chains to the hook retainers of
the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under
the trailer tongue and allow enough slack
for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the
parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the
tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For
four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-
equate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer
with electronically actuated brakes. When
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
Integrated Trailer Brake Module —
If Equipped
Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer
Brake Module (ITBM) for Electric and Electric
Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes.
NOTE:
This module has been designed and verified
with electric trailer brakes and new EOH
systems. Some previous EOH systems may not
be compatible with ITBM.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
The user interface consists of the following:
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake
control power output to the trailer brakes in
0.5 increments. The GAIN setting can be
increased to a maximum of ten or decreased to
a minimum of zero (no trailer braking).
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
load your brake system and cause it to fail.
You might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
ping distance. When towing, you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own
brakes and they should be of adequate
capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake
pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
1 — GAIN Adjustment Button
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever
4
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake
control for the specific towing condition and
should be changed as towing conditions change.
Changes to towing conditions include trailer load,
vehicle load, road conditions and weather.
Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to
activate power to the trailer's electric brakes
independent of the tow vehicle's brakes. If the
manual brake control lever is activated while the
brake is also applied, the greater of the two inputs
determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.
The trailer and the vehicle's brake lamps will
come on when either vehicle braking or manual
trailer brakes are applied.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical
connection status.
If no electrical connection is detected after the
ignition is turned on, pushing either the GAIN
adjustment button or sliding the manual brake
control lever will display the GAIN setting for
10 seconds and the “Trailer Brake Status
Indicator Light” will not be displayed.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the
“Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light” will flash.
Adjusting GAIN
NOTE:
This should only be performed in a traffic free
environment at speeds of approximately
20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
working condition, functioning normally
and properly adjusted. See your trailer
dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical
connections according to the trailer
manufacturer's instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is
plugged in, the trailer connected message
should appear in the instrument cluster
display (if the connection is not recognized by
the ITBM, braking functions will not be
available), the GAIN setting will illuminate and
the correct type of trailer must be selected
from the instrument cluster display options.
4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the
steering wheel until “TRAILER TOW”
appears on the screen.
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel
to enter “TRAILER TOW”.
6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the
Trailer Brake Type appears on the screen.
7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP
or DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer
Brake Type appears on the screen.
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer
on a dry, level surface at a speed of
20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and squeeze
the manual brake control lever completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by
squealing tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if
the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the
GAIN setting.
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at
a point just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing
a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be
attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting
of 10.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
*The suggested selection depends and may
change depending on the customer
preferences for braking performance. Condition
of the trailer brakes, driving and road state may
also affect the selection.
Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the
instrument cluster display. Display messages,
along with a single chime, will be displayed
when a malfunction is determined in the trailer
connection, trailer brake control, or on the
trailer Ú page 98.
NOTE:
An aftermarket controller may be available
for use with trailers with air or elec-
tric-over-hydraulic trailer brake systems. To
determine the type of brakes on your trailer
and the availability of controllers, check with
your trailer manufacturer or dealer.
Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it
may cause damage to the electrical system
and electronic modules of the vehicle. See an
authorized dealer if an aftermarket module is
to be installed.
Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH
Type of Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes
Electric over Hydraulic
Trailer Brakes
Electric over Hydraulic
Trailer Brakes
Load
*Under 10,000 lbs
(4,536 kg)
*Above 10,000 lbs
(4,536 kg)
*Under 10,000 lbs
(4,536 kg)
*Above 10,000 lbs
(4,536 kg)
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible
with the ITBM system may result in reduced
or complete loss of trailer braking. There may
be a increase in stopping distance or trailer
instability which could result in personal
injury.
CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible
with the ITBM system may result in reduced
or complete loss of trailer braking. There may
be a increase in stopping distance or trailer
instability which could result in damage to
your vehicle, trailer, or other property.
4
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to
the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a
trailer connector. Refer to the following
illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
TOWING TIPS
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area
located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing.
The transmission controls include a drive
strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing.
However, if frequent shifting does occur while in
DRIVE, select TOW/HAUL mode or select a lower
gear range (using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control).
NOTE:
Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower
gear range (using the ERS shift control) while
operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
Tow/Haul Mode
To reduce potential for automatic transmission
overheating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when
driving in hilly areas, or select a lower gear
range (using the (ERS) shift control) on more
severe grades.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy
loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experi-
ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
SNOWPLOW
NOTE:
Do not use this model vehicle for snowplow
applications.
WARNING!
Snowplows and other aftermarket equipment
should not be added to the front end of your
vehicle. The airbag crash sensors may be
affected by the change in the front end
structure. The airbags could deploy
unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a
collision resulting in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could
adversely affect performance of the airbag
system in a collision. Do not expect that the
airbag will perform as described earlier in this
manual.
CAUTION!
Using this vehicle for snowplow applications
can cause damage to the vehicle.
4
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow
applicable state and provincial laws. Contact
state and provincial Highway Safety offices
for additional details.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — TWO-WHEEL
D
RIVE MODELS
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive
models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are
OFF the ground. This may be accomplished
using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow
dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place
automatic transmission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
Transmission in PARK
Transfer case in N (Neutral)
Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
(Continued)
5. Turn the ignition OFF and remove the key
fob.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed
for towing, to secure the front wheels in the
straight position.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
F
OUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
NOTE:
The transfer case must be shifted into N
(Neutral) for recreational towing. The transmis-
sion must be shifted into PARK for recreational
towing. Refer to the following for the proper
transfer case N (Neutral) shifting procedure for
your vehicle.
Shifting Into N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground
will cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Do not disconnect the driveshaft because
fluid may leak from the transmission,
causing damage to internal parts.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing
with only one set of wheels on the ground
(front or rear) will cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage. Tow
with all four wheels either ON the ground, or
OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
Tow only in the forward direction. Towing
this vehicle backwards can cause severe
damage to the transfer case.
Before recreational towing, the transfer
case must be in NEUTRAL. To be certain the
transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL, perform
the procedure outlined under “Shifting Into
NEUTRAL”. Internal transmission damage
will result, if the transfer case is not in
NEUTRAL during towing.
The transmission must be placed in PARK
for recreational towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft
because fluid will leak from the transfer
case, causing damage to internal parts.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face
bar will be damaged.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the N (Neutral) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case N (Neutral) position disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the automatic transmission is in PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
4
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on
level ground, with the engine running.
Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Shift the transfer case into N (Neutral):
Push and hold the transfer case N
(Neutral) button. Some models have a
small, recessed “N” button (at the center
of the transfer case switches) that must
be pushed using a ballpoint pen or
similar object. Other models have a rect-
angular NEUTRAL switch, below the
rotary transfer case control knob. The N
(Neutral) indicator light will blink while
the shift is in progress. The light will stop
blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to
N (Neutral) is complete. After the shift is
completed and the N (Neutral) light stays
on, release the N (Neutral) button.
5. Release the parking brake.
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds
and ensure that there is no vehicle
movement.
8. Repeat steps six and seven with automatic
transmission in DRIVE.
9. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly
apply the parking brake. Turn off the engine.
For vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go, push
and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button
until the engine shuts off.
10. Shift the transmission into PARK. On
eight-speed transmissions the gear selector
will automatically select PARK when the
engine is turned off.
11. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode, then
cycle the ignition to the RUN mode and back
to the OFF mode. Remove the key fob from
the ignition.
12. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
suitable tow bar.
13. Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
With electronically shifted transfer case:
Steps 2 through 4 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the N (Neutral)
button, and must continue to be met until the
shift has been completed. If any of these
requirements are not met before pushing the
N (Neutral) button or are no longer met
during the shift, the N (Neutral) indicator light
will flash continuously until all requirements
are met or until the N (Neutral) button is
released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for
a shift to take place and for the position indi-
cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is
not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not
take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not
been met.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in N
(Neutral) before recreational towing to
prevent damage to internal parts.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
Shifting Out Of N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop,
leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Start the engine. Shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL.
With manual shift transfer case, shift the
transfer case lever to the desired posi-
tion.
With electronically shifted transfer case
with rotary selector switch, push and hold
the transfer case N (Neutral) button until
the N (Neutral) indicator light turns off.
After the N (Neutral) indicator light turns
off, release the N (Neutral) button. After
the N (Neutral) button has been released,
the transfer case will shift to the position
indicated by the selector switch.
With electronically shifted transfer case
with push-button selector switch, push
and hold the switch for the desired
transfer case position, until the N
(Neutral) indicator light turns off and the
desired position indicator light turns on.
NOTE:
When shifting out of transfer case N (Neutral),
turning the engine off is not required, but may
be helpful to avoid gear clash. With the
eight-speed automatic transmission, the engine
must remain running, since turning the engine
off will shift the transmission to PARK (and the
transmission must be in NEUTRAL for the
transfer case to shift out of Neutral).
5. Turn the engine off. Shift automatic
transmission into PARK. On eight-speed
transmissions the gear selector will
automatically select PARK when the engine
is turned off.
6. Release the brake pedal.
7. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
8. Start the engine.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal.
10. Release the parking brake.
11. Shift the transmission into gear, release the
brake pedal, and check that the vehicle
operates normally.
NOTE:
With electronically shifted transfer case:
Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be
met before pushing the button to shift out of
N (Neutral), and must continue to be met
until the shift has been completed. If any of
these requirements are not met before
pushing the button or are no longer met
during the shift, the N (Neutral) indicator light
will flash continuously until all requirements
are met or until the button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for
a shift to take place and for the position indi-
cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is
not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not
take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not
been met.
4
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or
other slippery surfaces may cause the driving
wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This
phenomenon occurs when there is a difference
in the surface traction under the rear (driving)
wheels.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
through shallow standing water, consider the
following Warnings and Cautions before doing so.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause
sudden pulling of the rear wheels. You could
lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a
collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path
where water is flowing and/or rising (as in
storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away
the road or path's surface and cause your
vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to
follow this warning may result in injuries that
are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not
exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which
increases stopping distances. Therefore,
after driving through standing water, drive
slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal
several times to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
(Continued)
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Care should be taken when attempting to climb
steep hills or driving diagonally across a hill or
slope. If natural obstacles force you to travel
diagonally up or down a hill, choose a mild angle
and keep as little side tilt as possible. Keep the
vehicle moving and make turns slowly and
cautiously.
If you must back down a hill, back straight down
using REVERSE gear. Never back down in
NEUTRAL or diagonally across the hill.
When driving over sand, mud, and other soft
terrain, shift to low gear and drive steadily.
Apply the accelerator slowly to avoid spinning
the wheels.
Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of
driving.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing
water before driving through it. Never drive
through standing water that is deeper than
the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the
vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when
driving through standing water. This will
minimize wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is
milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine
can cause it to lock up and stall out, and
cause serious internal damage to the
engine. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
4
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After
going off-road, it is always a good idea to check
for damage. That way you can get any problems
taken care of right away and have your vehicle
ready when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness,
particularly on the chassis, drivetrain compo-
nents, steering, and suspension. Retighten
them, if required, and torque to the values
specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They
might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses,
axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand,
water, or similar dirty conditions, have the
radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake
linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
If you experience unusual vibration after
driving in mud, slush or similar conditions,
check the wheels for impacted material.
Impacted material can cause a wheel imbal-
ance and freeing the wheels of it will correct
the situation.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes
may cause excessive wear or unpredictable
braking. You might not have full braking
power when you need it to prevent a collision.
If you have been operating your vehicle in
dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and
cleaned as necessary.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
165
(Continued)
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display system,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle
systems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as
needed. Similar to a computer or other devices,
your vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about
available Uconnect software updates.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible
that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted
source. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 MULTIMEDIA
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired
communications cannot be assured. Third
parties may unlawfully intercept information
and private communications without your
consent Ú page 117.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the
instrument panel. These buttons allow you to
access and change the Customer
Programmable Features. Many features can
vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below
and/or beside the Uconnect system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the
center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen
Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Touchscreen And Faceplate Buttons
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display and the
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Press the Apps button, then press the
Settings button on the touchscreen to display
the menu setting screen. In this mode, the
Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
All settings should be changed with the igni-
tion in the ON/RUN position.
When making a selection, only press one button
at a time to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred
setting “option” until a check mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Once the setting is complete,
press the X button on the touchscreen to close
out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or
Down Arrow button on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
MULTIMEDIA 167
Language
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system
will display in the chosen language. The available setting is:
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of
the touchscreen. The available settings are:
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The
available languages are English, Français, and Español.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the
system set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system
automatically adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will
allow the user to adjust the brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
5
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 MULTIMEDIA
Units
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will
display in the instrument cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
Keyboard
This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable
keyboards are “ABCDEF Keyboard”, “QWERTY Keyboard”, and “AZERTY
Keyboard”.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically
after five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Turn-By-Turn in Cluster
This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
Fuel Saver Display This setting will enable fuel saver mode in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L),
“Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Capacity”
(Gal [US], Gal [UK], or L) units of measurement independently.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
MULTIMEDIA 169
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition
system. The “Brief” setting provides a shortened audio description from
the system. The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description
from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the command list on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the command list. The “With Help” setting will
show the command list and provide a brief description of what the
command does. The “Never” setting will turn the command list off.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The
system will control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time And Format/Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With
GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will
set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to
a 24-hour format.
5
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be
off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours.
The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must
be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the
minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the rear backup camera when
shifting out of reverse.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the backup camera active guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the backup camera fixed guidelines on or off.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
MULTIMEDIA 171
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings.
These options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To
access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
Setting Name Description
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
detected and provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The
available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The
available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse This setting will turn the Tilt Mirrors in Reverse on or off.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the rear backup camera when
shifting out of reverse.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
5
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the
country of the vehicle purchased.
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the ON/
RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position.
The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is
shifted out of REVERSE. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the rain sensing auto wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the
headlights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available
settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the
headlights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings
are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
MULTIMEDIA 173
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks
This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when
the vehicle reaches 12 mph (19 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from
the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the
key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button
is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the
Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from
the key fob.
5
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 MULTIMEDIA
Auto-On Comfort Systems
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort Systems button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key
fob are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only
unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All
Doors” setting will unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock
button.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless
Enter-N-Go) on or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that
have been linked to the key fob.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With
Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats
(if equipped) or heated steering wheel (if equipped) when the vehicle is
remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the
comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the
comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will
activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
MULTIMEDIA 175
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options
When the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These
settings will only activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
Suspension/Air Suspension — If Equipped
When the Suspension/Air Suspension button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s air suspension.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Key Off/Engine Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine
is turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate.
The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain
on after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount
of time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
Auto Entry/Exit
This setting will automatically lower the vehicle ride height for easier
entry and exit of the vehicle.
Setting Name Description
Sound Horn With Lower
This setting will sound the horn when the Lower button is pressed on the
key fob.
Flash Lights With Lower
This setting will flash the lights when the Lower button is pressed on the
key fob.
5
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 MULTIMEDIA
Display Suspension Messages
This setting will display suspension messages in the Instrument Cluster
Display. The “All” setting will display all available messages. The
“Warnings Only” setting will only display warning messages.
Aero Mode
This setting will automatically adjust the vehicle ride height depending on
the vehicle speed.
Tire Jack Mode
This setting will disable the air suspension system to assist in changing a
spare tire.
Transport Mode This setting will disable the air suspension system for flat towing.
Wheel Alignment Mode
This setting must be activated before performing a wheel alignment.
Refer to an authorized dealer for further information.
Four Corner Air Suspension Modes
There are three air suspension modes designed to protect the system in
unique situations. Tire Jack Mode is selected to assist in changing a
spare tire. Transport Mode is selected to assist when the vehicle is being
flat bed towed. Wheel Alignment Mode is selected before performing a
wheel alignment. Refer to an authorized dealer for information.
Setting Name Description
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
MULTIMEDIA 177
Trailer Brake/Trailer
When the Trailer Brake/Trailer button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to trailer towing.
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change
the audio location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
Setting Name Description
Trailer Select
Select from “Trailer 1”, “Trailer 2”, “Trailer 3”, and “Trailer 4”. These
trailer designations can be used to save different trailer settings.
Trailer Brake Type
This setting will set the system to a specific trailer type. The available
options are “Light Electric”, “Heavy Electric”, “Light
Electric-Over-Hydraulic”, and “Heavy Electric-Over-Hydraulic”.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/
back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set
audio location.
Equalizer
This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the
audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher
setting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The
available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
5
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external
audio device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through
the AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play
This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected
device.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb” settings menu. The settings
are “Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default),
and “Custom Auto Reply Message” (create message).
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
Paired Audio Sources This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
MULTIMEDIA 179
SiriusXM® Setup
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can
be used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
Reset/Restore Settings To Default
When the Reset/Restore Settings To Default button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect
system back to its default settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune
to a music channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel
list will display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM®
Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Setting Name Description
Restore Settings
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
default.
Reset App Drawer This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all
personal data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
5
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
1 — Radio Button
2 — Media Button
3 — Phone Button
4 — Volume & On/Off Button
5 — Mute Button
6 — Compass Button
7 — Settings Button
8 — More Button
9 — Enter/Browse & Tune/Scroll Knob
10 — Screen Off Button
Feature Description
Radio/Media
Press the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media
Mode and access the radio functions and external audio sources
Ú page 183.
Phone
Press the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free
phone system Ú page 195.
Settings
Press the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 166.
Push the Enter/Browse button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted
selection on the screen. Rotate the Tune/Scroll rotary knob to scroll
through a list or tune a radio station.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
MULTIMEDIA 181
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the Mute button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio
system off. Push it again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the Volume & On/Off
button on the faceplate to turn the system on or off.
Feature Description
Compass Press the Compass button to access the vehicle’s compass.
More Press the More button to access additional options.
Feature Description
5
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Please read this manual carefully before using
the system. It contains instructions on how to
use the system in a safe and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the
touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety
precautions. Failure to do so may result in injury
or property damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage
to the product. See an authorized dealer for
repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set
to a level that still allows you to hear outside
traffic and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use
the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or sound system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on
the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-
ture away from the system. Besides damage
to the system, moisture can cause electric
shocks as with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed depen-
dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
Care And Maintenance
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard
or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry,
etc.), which could scratch the surface.
Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly
on the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber
lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the
touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water
solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the
solvent manufacturer's precautions and
directions Ú page 360.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
MULTIMEDIA 183
UCONNECT MODES
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the
three and nine o’clock positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
with a push button in the center and controls
the volume and mode of the sound system.
Pushing the top of the rocker switch will
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for
the next available station and pushing the
bottom of the switch will Seek Down for the next
available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio presets.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the switch up twice will go
forward two tracks. Pushing the bottom switch
goes to the beginning of the current track, or the
beginning of the previous track if it is within
eight seconds after the current track begins to
play. Double pressing the bottom button switch
will skip to the previous track if it is after eight
seconds into the current track.
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — Preset Radio Stations
2 — All Preset Radio Stations
3 — Radio Band (AM/FM)
4 — Seek Down
5 — Tune
6 — Station Info
7 — Seek Up
8 — Audio Settings
5
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 MULTIMEDIA
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to
enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner
modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can then be selected
by pressing the corresponding buttons in Radio
Mode.
Volume & On/Off Control
Push the Volume & On/Off control knob to turn
on and off the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns
continuously (360 degrees) in either direction,
without stopping. Turning the Volume & On/Off
control knob clockwise increases the volume,
and counterclockwise decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound
will be set at the same volume level as last
played.
Mute Button
Push the Mute button to mute or unmute the
system.
Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
Enter/Browse button to choose a selection.
Seek
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated
by pressing the double arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio
station display or by pressing the left steering
wheel audio control button up or down.
Seek Up and Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek
Down button to tune the radio to the next
available station or channel. During a Seek Up/
Down function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band
two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
Press and hold, and then release the Seek
Up or Seek Down button to advance the
radio through the available stations or channels
at a faster rate. The radio stops at the next
available station or channel when the button on
the touchscreen is released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Seek Down button will scan the different
frequency bands at a slower rate.
Info — If Equipped
Press the Info button to display information
related to the currently playing song and radio
station.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of
the radio screen to directly tune to a desired
radio station or channel.
Press the available number button on the
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired station.
Once a number has been entered, any numbers
that are no longer possible (stations that cannot
be reached) will become deactivated/grayed out.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
MULTIMEDIA 185
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
Back button on the touchscreen.
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been
entered, press “GO”. The Direct Tune screen will
close, and the system will automatically tune to
that station.
Radio Voice Commands
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel
and wait for the beep to say a command. See
some examples below.
“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
push the VR button and say “Help”. The
system provides you with a list of commands.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode —
If Equipped
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Changing To
SiriusXM®
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
Manual kit for more information.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and
bill at then-current rates until you call
SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See
SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for complete
terms at www.siriusxm.com (US) or
www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change.
SiriusXM® satellite service is available only to
those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous
USA and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is
also available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with
coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
service is available throughout their satellite
service area and in AK. © 2020 SiriusXM®
Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite
radio does not receive a signal in underground
parking garages or tunnels.
5
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 MULTIMEDIA
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver
require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service.
When the Radio does not have the necessary
subscription, the Radio is able to receive the
Preview channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US visit siriusxm.com/
getallaccess or call: 1-800-643-2112
Canada visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/ or call:
1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite Mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the
top of the screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed
in the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are
displayed below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions
common to all radio modes, the replay, Traffic/
Weather button, and Favorite button functions
are available in SiriusXM® Mode.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio
Replay
The replay function provides a means to store
and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and
48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is
switched, content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen.
The play/pause, rewind/forward and live
buttons will display at the top of the screen,
along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on
the touchscreen any time during the Replay
Mode.
1 — Browse
2 — Radio Bands
3 — Direct Tune
4 — Info Button
5 — Next Button
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
MULTIMEDIA 187
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the
touchscreen to pause the playing of live or
rewound content at any time. Play can be
resumed by pressing the Pause/Play button
again on the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to
rewind the content in steps of five seconds.
Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen
for more than two seconds rewinds the content.
The radio begins playing the content at the point
at which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen forwards the content in steps of
five seconds. Forwarding of the content can only
be done when the content is previously
rewound, and therefore, cannot be done for live
content. A continuous press of the Forward
button on the touchscreen also forwards the
content. The radio begins playing the content at
the point at which the press is release.
Live Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to
resume the playing of live content.
5
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 MULTIMEDIA
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen
to activate the favorites menu, which will time
out within 20 seconds in absence of user
interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of
the X button.
The favorites feature enables you to set a
favorite artist or song that is currently playing.
The radio then uses this information to alert you
when either the favorite artist or song is being
played at any time by any of the SiriusXM®
Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set
a favorite artist, press the Favorites button on
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist
button on the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set
a favorite song, press the Favorites button on
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Song
button on the touchscreen.
Browse In SXM
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can
exit submenus to return to a parent menu by
pressing the Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen.
When pressing the All button, the following
categories become available:
Channel List Press the Channel List to display
all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can
scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and
Down arrows, located on the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by oper-
ating the Tune/Scroll knob.
Genre List Press the Genre button on the
touchscreen to display a list of Genres. You
can select any desired Genre by pressing the
Genre List. The radio tunes to a channel with
the content in the selected Genre.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse
screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the
Favorites list and to configure the Alert Settings,
along with providing a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Favorites list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the
Up and Down arrows located at the right side of
the screen. Scrolling can also be done by
operating the Tune/Scroll knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or
press the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to
be deleted.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
MULTIMEDIA 189
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu
allows you to choose from a visual alert or
audible and visual alert when one of your
favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left
of the Browse screen. This feature provides you
with the ability to select teams, edit the
selection, and set alerts.
On-Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the
radio to that channel.
Add/Delete — If Equipped
Press the Add/Delete button on the
touchscreen to activate the League Scroll list.
Press the chosen league and a scroll list of all
teams within the league will appear, then you
can select a team by pressing the
corresponding box. A check mark appears for all
teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or
press the Trash Can icon next to the selection to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from “Alert me to on-air games upon
start” or “Alert upon score update” or both when
one or more of your selections is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
5
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 MULTIMEDIA
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from
the beginning when you tune to a music
channel using one of the 12 presets. This
feature occurs the first time the preset is
selected during that current song.
Setting Presets
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
and are activated by pressing any of the Preset
buttons, located at the top of the screen.
When you are on a station that you wish to save
as a preset, press and hold the numbered
button on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio Modes.
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
A set of four presets will appear on the screen.
Press the All button to view all saved presets. To
remove a saved preset, a new preset must be
saved over the old one.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main
menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — Balance/Fade
2 — Equalizer
3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
4 — Surround Sound
5 — Loudness
6 — AUX Volume Offset
7 — Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
MULTIMEDIA 191
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio
between the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front
speakers. Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right buttons or press and drag
the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or – buttons or press and drag the level bar to increase or
decrease each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”,
and “3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with
variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed
increases to compensate for normal road noise.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every
direction as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
AUX Volume Offset
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This
alters the AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between
plus or minus three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
Auto Play — If Equipped
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media
device is connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is
turned on. Press “Off” to turn the setting off.
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until
the driver or passenger door is opened or when the Radio Off Delay
selected time has expired.
5
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 MULTIMEDIA
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Operating Media Mode
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA
button located on the faceplate.
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or
Source Select button on the touchscreen and
the desired mode button on the touchscreen.
USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are the Media
sources available. When available, you can
select the Browse button on the touchscreen to
be given these options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, Media
Mode is entered by pushing the Media button
located on the faceplate.
Types of Media Modes
USB Mode
Overview
USB Mode is entered by either inserting a USB
device into the USB port, or by pushing the
MEDIA button on the faceplate and then
selecting the USB button.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, if you
insert a USB device with the ignition ON, the unit
will switch to USB Mode and begin to play. The
display will show the track number and index
time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at
the start of track 1.
Bluetooth® Mode
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth®
Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth®
device, containing music, to the Uconnect
system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must
be paired to the Uconnect Phone to
communicate with the Uconnect system.
1 — Seek Down
2 — Seek Up
3 — Browse
4 — Source
5 — Pause/Play
6 — Info
7 — More Options
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
MULTIMEDIA 193
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, push the
Media button located on the faceplate. Once in
Media Mode, press the Source button on the
touchscreen and select the Bluetooth® button
Ú page 195.
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the
Bluetooth® button on the left side of the
touchscreen or under the Source Select/Select
Source button (if equipped).
AUX Mode
Overview
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an
AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio
jack into the AUX port or pushing the Media
button on the faceplate and then selecting the
Source button and then the AUX button.
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the
Auxiliary device cable into the AUX Port. If you
insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and
the radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode
and begin to play.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g.,
selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.)
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
Volume button, Volume/Mute rotary knob, or
the On/Off rotary knob, or with the volume of
the attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if
the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set
too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for
the radio unit to play the music on the device.
Seek Up /Seek Down
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
device. Press and release the Seek Down
button on the touchscreen to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or to return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the
USB device is within the first three seconds of
the current selection.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the
Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next
selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and
release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the
current selection, or return to the beginning of
the previous selection if the Bluetooth® device
is within the first second of the current
selection.
Browse
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to display the browse window. In
USB Mode, the left side of the browse window
displays a list of ways you can browse through
the contents of the USB device. If supported by
the device, you can browse by Folder, Artist,
Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the desired
button on the touchscreen on the left side of the
screen. The center of the browse window shows
items and its sub-functions, which can be
scrolled through by pressing the Up and Down
buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob can
also be used to scroll.
5
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 MULTIMEDIA
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, rotate the
Browse button on the touchscreen to scroll
through and select a desired track on the device.
Press the Exit button on the touchscreen if you
wish to cancel the Browse function.
Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
USB.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on
the touchscreen to select the desired audio
source: Bluetooth®.
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
AUX.
Repeat
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the
touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality.
The Repeat button on the touchscreen is
highlighted when active. The Radio will continue
to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as
the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button
again to enter Repeat All. The radio will continue
to play all the current tracks, repeatedly, as long
as the repeat function is active. To cancel
Repeat, press the Repeat button a third time.
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen to play the selections on the USB
device in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off.
Audio
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the
Audio button Ú page 183.
Info
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Info
button on the touchscreen to display the
current track information. Press the Info or X
button on the touchscreen a second time to
cancel this feature.
Tracks
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Tracks
button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up
with the Song List. The song currently playing is
indicated by an arrow and lines above and
below the song title. When in the Tracks List
screen you can rotate the Tune/Scroll knob to
highlight a track (indicated by the line above
and below the track name) and then push the
Enter/Browse knob to start playing that track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device
supports this feature, press the Tracks button
on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the
Song List. The currently playing song is
indicated by a red arrow and lines above and
below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the
pop-up.
Media Voice Commands
Uconnect offers connections via USB,
Bluetooth®, and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice
operation is only available for connected USB
and AUX devices.
Push the VR button located on the steering
wheel. After the beep, say one of the following
commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
“Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album
Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight
Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
MULTIMEDIA 195
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match
exactly how the artist, album, song, and genre
information is displayed.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system.
It allows you to dial a phone number with your
mobile phone.
The feature supports the following:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John
Smith Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward
one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages.
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling Back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming
Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed
Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”).
Searching Contacts phone number (“Search
for John Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phone-
books displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so
they are easily accessible on the Main Phone
screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent
Call logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS
Messages.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for
easy access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted
through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using
the Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US visit UconnectPhone.com or call
877-855-8400
Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
800-387-9983
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as
you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to
mute the system's microphone for private
conversation.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
5
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 MULTIMEDIA
The Phone feature is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the
global standard that enables different
electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station. Ensure you
phone is turned on with Bluetooth® active and
has been paired to the Uconnect system. Up to
10 mobile phones or audio devices are allowed
to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or
paired) mobile phone and one audio device can
be used with the system at a time.
Phone Button
The Phone button on your steering wheel is
used to get into the Phone Mode and make
calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls,
view phonebook, etc. When you press the
button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your
signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
The Voice Command button on your steering
wheel is only used for “barge in” and when you
are already in a call or want to make another call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used
to access the Voice Commands for the
Uconnect Voice Command features if your
vehicle is equipped.
Phone Operation
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu
structure. Voice commands are required after
most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two
general methods for how Voice Command
works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command
and then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must
wait for the beep, which follows the “Listen”
prompt or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound
commands can be used. For example,
instead of saying “Call” and then “John
Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said: “Call John
Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound command form of the
voice command is given. You can also break
the commands into parts and say each part
of the command when you are asked for it.
For example, you can use the compound
command form voice command “Search for
John Smith,” or you can break the
compound command form into two voice
commands: “Search Contacts” and when
asked, “John Smith.” Please remember, the
Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in
a normal conversational tone, as if speaking
to someone sitting a few feet/meters away
from you.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
MULTIMEDIA 197
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a
Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR)
engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences.
The system filters out certain non-word
utterances and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.”
The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to”.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone
call” and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in
the same phrase or sentence, the system
identifies the topic or context and provides the
associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do
you want to call?” in the case where a phone
call was requested but the specific name was
not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the
system requires more information from the
user, it will ask a question to which the user can
respond without pushing the Voice Command
button on the steering wheel.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you
want to know your options at any prompt, say
“Help” following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle,
simply push the Phone button (if active) on your
steering wheel and say a command or say
“Help”. All Phone sessions begin with a push of
the VR button or the Phone button.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say
“Cancel” and you will be returned to the main
menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone
button on your steering wheel when the system
is listening for a command and be returned to
the main or previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must
pair your compatible Bluetooth®-enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the
process of establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the Uconnect
system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need
to reference your mobile phone’s manual.
Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete
mobile phone compatibility information.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
5
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 MULTIMEDIA
Follow the steps below to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Press the Phone button.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently
connected with the system, a pop-up will
appear asking if you would like to pair a
mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user
enters Phone Mode and no other
device(s) have previously been paired. If
the system has a phone previously
paired, even if no phone is currently
connected with the system, this pop-up
will not appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for Bluetooth®
connections.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make
sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the
PIN from the pop-up on your mobile phone.
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Pairing or
Settings button from the Uconnect Phone
main screen.
Press the Paired Phones button.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the
connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect
system automatically when entering the
vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected
to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is
selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth®
screen, and the Uconnect system will
reconnect to the Bluetooth® device.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
MULTIMEDIA 199
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The most recent phone
paired will have the higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect
system to access your “messages” and
“contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync
your contacts with the Uconnect system.
You can also use the following VR command to
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any
screen on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones”
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the
Uconnect system may interfere with the Blue-
tooth® connection. If this happens, simply
repeat the pairing process. However, first make
sure to delete the device from the list of phones
on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to
remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to
the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio
Device within range. If you need to choose a
particular phone or audio device follow these
steps:
1. Press the
Settings
button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
buttons.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will
appear; press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Disconnecting or Deleting A Phone Or Audio
Device
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or
Settings button.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
buttons.
1 — Disconnect Device Or Disconnect Phone
2 — Make Favorite
3 — Delete Device/Phone
5
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 MULTIMEDIA
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name for a different
phone or audio device than the currently
connected device or press the preferred
Connected Phone from the list.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete
Device button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio sources
screen, press the Settings button located
to the right of the device name for a
different phone or audio device than the
currently connected device or press the
preferred “Connected Phone” from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone
has the ability to download contact names and
number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with
Phonebook Access Profile may support this
feature. Your mobile phone may receive a
pop-up asking for permission for the Uconnect
system to access your messages and contacts.
Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts
with the Uconnect system.
See the Uconnect website,
UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phonebook, follow the procedure in the
“Voice Command” in this section.
Automatic download and update of a phone-
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect Phone, for example,
after you start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with
four numbers per contact will be downloaded
and updated every time a phone is
connected to the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of entries
downloaded, there may be a short delay
before the latest downloaded names can be
used. Until then, if available, the previously
downloaded phonebook is available for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently
connected mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited
or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can
only be edited on the mobile phone. The
changes are transferred and updated to
Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection.
Managing Your Favorites — If Equipped
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen,
and then press one of the +Add Favorite
Contact buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen, and
then select the appropriate number. Press
the Down Arrow button next to the selected
number to display the option’s pop-up. In the
pop-up, select “Add to Favorites”.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
MULTIMEDIA 201
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
To Remove A Favorite — If Equipped
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites”
from the Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon next to the
contact you want to remove from your
favorites. This will bring up the options for
that Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the
Favorite.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are
available and supported by Bluetooth® on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile
service plan provides three-way calling, this
feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
for the features that you have.
Listed below are the phone options with
Uconnect:
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name,
Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or
Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the
following call features:
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Other phone call features include:
End Call
Hold/Unhold/Resume
Swap two active calls
1 — Answer
2 — Mute/Unmute
3 — Ignore
4 — Transfer
5
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 MULTIMEDIA
Key Pad Number Entry
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the
touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the
touchscreens to enter the number and
press “Dial/Call”.
Recent Calls — If Equipped
You may browse a list of the most recent of each
of the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
Calls button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your
steering wheel and perform the above
operation. For example, say “Show my incoming
calls”.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone,
the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle
audio system. Push the Phone button on the
steering wheel, press the Answer button on the
touchscreen.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold
and answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect
system in the market today do not support
rejecting an incoming call when another call is
in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer
an incoming call or ignore it.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable
notifications from incoming calls and texts,
allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while Do Not
Disturb is active.
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
MULTIMEDIA 203
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth® Message
Access Profile (MAP).
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On
Hold button on the Phone main screen.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
You can place a call on hold by pressing the
Hold button on the Phone main screen, then
dial a number from the keypad (if supported by
your mobile phone), recent calls, SMS Inbox or
from the phonebooks.
Toggling Between Calls
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
If two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Swap Calls button on the
phone main screen. Only one call can be placed
on hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and
one on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button
on the Phone main screen to combine all calls
into a conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
End Call button on the touchscreen or the
Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only
the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
is a call on hold, it will become the new active
call.
5
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 MULTIMEDIA
Redial
Push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number
that was dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone
call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle
ignition has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range
for the Bluetooth® connection. It is recom-
mended to press the Transfer button on the
touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone without
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your connected mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the
Transfer button on the Phone main screen.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
Voice Command
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you
Ensure that no one other than you is
speaking during a voice command period
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not
always work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names
in your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is
in motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized
when the entries are not similar. You can say
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most
number combinations is supported, some
shortcut dialing number combinations may not
be supported.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
MULTIMEDIA 205
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone
and network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Phone Voice Commands
Making and answering hands-free phone calls
is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook
button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your
system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for
mobile phone compatibility and pairing
instructions.
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep
to say a command. See some examples below:
“Call John Smith”
“Dial 123 456 7890”
“Redial” (call previous outgoing phone
number)
“Call back” (call previously answered
incoming phone number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice
Command, push the Phone button and say
“Call”, then pronounce the name exactly as it
appears in your phonebook. When a contact
has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work”.
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect can announce incoming text
messages. Push the VR button or Phone
button and say:
1. “
Listen
” to have the system read an
incoming text message. (Must have
compatible mobile phone paired to
Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has
been read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the predefined messag-
es and follow the system prompts.
5
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided
table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose
the message.
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have
the full implementation of the Message Access
Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature.
For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further
information on how to enable this feature on
your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s®
“User Manual”.
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not
compatible with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is
equipped with Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your
voice to send a text message.
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
When used with your Apple® iPhone®
connected to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri
lets you use your voice to send text messages,
select media, place phone calls and much
more. Siri uses your natural language to
understand what you mean and responds back
to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep,
you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5
<or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my
way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
MULTIMEDIA 207
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones may lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
connection can generally be re-established by
restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone is
recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to
either the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a
language change, you must wait at least 15
seconds prior to using the system Ú page 360.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This
condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile phone antenna. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your
radio performance does not satisfactorily
“clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation
when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal
wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio Ú page 360.
5
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability
and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during
braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure
that the ABS is working properly each time the
vehicle is started and driven. During this
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound
as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels are
beginning to lock. Road conditions such as ice,
snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop)
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop
NOTE:
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modifica-
tion may result in degraded ABS performance.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead
to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
SAFETY 209
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning
and that service is required. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to
restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the
ABS Warning Light does not come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This
system includes the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), Electronic Roll Mitigation
(ERM), Hill Start Assist (HSA) and Traction
Control System (TCS). These systems work
together to enhance both vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Hill
Descent Control (HDC) and Trailer Sway Control
(TSC).
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the
brake system is not functioning properly and
that immediate service is required. If the Brake
System Warning Light does not come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and
amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results
in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 SAFETY
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The EBD function manages the distribution of the
braking torque between the front and rear axles
by limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This
is done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to
avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear
axle from entering the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel
angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to
potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine
power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel
lift occurring during severe or evasive driving
maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving
the roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to
Ú
page 210 for a
complete explanation of the available ESC modes.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The ESC system enhances directional control
and stability of the vehicle under various driving
conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or
understeering of the vehicle by applying the
brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition. Engine power may also be reduced to
help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
above conditions.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
located in the instrument cluster will start to
flash as soon as the ESC system becomes
active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when the Trailer
Sway Control (TSC) is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll
overs, especially those that involve leaving
the roadway or striking objects or other
vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
SAFETY 211
(Continued)
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating
modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used
for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC
modes should only be used for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the ESC OFF switch and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC
on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF switch
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 SAFETY
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes,
the push and release of the button will toggle
the ESC modes. Multiple attempts may be
required to return to "ESC On" mode.
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only and should not be used on any
public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC
features are turned off. To enter the “Full Off”
mode, push and hold the ESC OFF switch for five
seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running. After five seconds, a chime will
sound, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
illuminate, and the ESC OFF message will
display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily push the ESC OFF switch.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to
“Partial Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a
predetermined speed. When the vehicle speed
slows below the predetermined speed the
system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive
modes (if equipped).
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func-
tionality of ESC, except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section, has
been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator
Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine
torque reduction and stability features are
disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive
maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full
Off” mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only.
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavail-
able. In an emergency evasive maneuver,
the ESC system will not engage to assist in
maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is
only intended for off-highway or off-road use.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent collisions.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
SAFETY 213
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON position. It should
go out with the engine running. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes
on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
(located in the instrument cluster) starts to
flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the
ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come
on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON
position, the ESC system will be on even if it
was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
the customer has elected to have the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a
reduced mode.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving
while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle speed
while descending hills during various driving
situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by
actively controlling the brakes.
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but
the following conditions must also be met to
enable HDC:
Driveline is in 4WD Low
Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h)
Parking brake is released
Driver door is closed
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 SAFETY
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate
automatically if driven down a grade of
sufficient magnitude. The set speed for HDC is
selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by
using the gear shift +/-. The following
summarizes the HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but
will not activate.
R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
target speed selection, but will not affect the
gear chosen by the transmission. When actively
controlling HDC the transmission will shift
appropriately for the driver-selected set speed
and corresponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if
any of the following conditions occur:
Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle
or brake application
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h)
Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an
uphill grade
Vehicle is shifted to PARK (P)
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of
the following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low
The parking brake is applied
The driver door opens
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately)
HDC detects excessive brake temperature
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
SAFETY 215
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers
feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi-
nate and remain on solid when HDC is enabled
or activated. This is the normal operating
condition for HDC.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when the
driver pushes the HDC switch but enable
conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when HDC
disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
when HDC deactivates due to overheated
brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will
activate again once the brakes have cooled
sufficiently.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for
a short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order
for HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE (R) gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE (R) gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate if
the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL
(N). For vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
will remain active.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending
hills. The driver must remain attentive to the
driving conditions and is responsible for
maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 SAFETY
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster
display, refer to Ú page 98 for further infor-
mation.
If disabling HSA using Uconnect settings,
refer to Ú page 166 for further information.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to
Ú
page 146 for further information.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA
is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to
other vehicles, people, and objects, and most
importantly brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated
and deactivated with the brake switch. If so,
there may not be enough brake pressure to
hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill
when the brake pedal is released. In order to
avoid rolling down an incline while resuming
acceleration, manually activate the trailer
brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure
prior to releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-
mission in PARK (P).
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
SAFETY 217
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” or “Full Off” modes.
Traction Control System (TCS)
TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS
may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s)
and/or reduce engine power to provide enhanced
acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS,
Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similarly
to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel
spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven
axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will
apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow
more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that
is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if
TCS and ESC are in reduced modes.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure based on the vehicle recommended
cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. The tire pressure will also increase
as the vehicle is driven — this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
See Ú page 329 for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low-pressure warning limit for any reason,
including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists,
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at
or above the recommended cold placard
pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(TPMS Warning Light) illuminates, you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS
Warning Light to turn off. The system will
automatically update and the TPMS Warning
Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 SAFETY
(Continued)
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If
the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease
the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi
(158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low
enough to turn on the TPMS Warning Light.
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to
rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this
situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if
underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning
Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
actual tire pressure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been estab-
lished for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
SAFETY 219
The TPMS consists of the following
components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster
and a chime will sound when tire
pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a graphic
showing the pressure values of each tire with
the low tire pressure values in a different color.
An "Inflate to XX" message will also be
displayed.
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” Message
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure
condition (those in a different color in the
instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message.
Once the system receives the updated tire
pressures, the system will automatically
update, the graphic display in the instrument
cluster will return to its original color, and the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPMS Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. The system fault will also
sound a chime. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure
value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 SAFETY
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the TPMS
Warning Light will no longer flash, and the
"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer
display, and a pressure value will display in
place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
Signal interference due to electronic devices
or driving next to facilities emitting the same
radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors
Installing aftermarket window tinting that
contains materials that may block radio wave
signals
Accumulation of snow or ice around the
wheels or wheel housings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors
A system fault may occur due to an incorrect
TPMS sensor location condition. When a system
fault occurs due to an incorrect TPMS sensor
location, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. The system fault will also sound a chime.
In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
“Tire Pressure Temporarily Unavailable”
message in place of the tire pressure display
screen. If the ignition switch is cycled, this
sequence will repeat, providing the system fault
still exists. If the system fault no longer exists,
the TPMS Warning Light will no longer flash and
the tire pressure display screen will be
displayed showing the tire pressure values for
the correct locations.
Vehicles With Non-Matching Full Size Spare Or
Compact Spare
The non-matching full size spare or compact
spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the non-matching full size spare
or compact spare tire.
If you install the non-matching full size spare
or compact spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, upon the next ignition switch
cycle, the TPMS Warning Light and a “LOW
TIRE” message will remain on and a chime
will sound. In addition, the graphic in the
instrument cluster will still display a pressure
value in a different color and an “Inflate to
XX” message.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
SAFETY 221
After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the instru-
ment cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (--) in place
of the pressure value.
For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a
chime will sound, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster
will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (--) in place of the pres-
sure value.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
non-matching full size spare or compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition,
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off and the
graphic in the instrument cluster will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (--), as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pres-
sure warning limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up
to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your
passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured
in the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position Ú page 240.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint Ú page 240.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 SAFETY
(Continued)
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and
deployment occurs, the side air bags will
inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, see Ú page 356 for customer
service contact information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position,
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
SAFETY 223
(Continued)
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on
the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the
rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until the driver and
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Quad Cab and
Crew Cab front center seating position have
combination lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal conditions.
However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and
reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 SAFETY
(Continued)
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
SAFETY 225
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grab the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automat-
ically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger
seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
position, and if you are taller than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
position. After you release the anchorage button,
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
SAFETY 227
First Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions (Regular Cab Only)
The first row center seat belt (Regular Cab only)
features a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and
buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach
from the lower anchor when the seat is folded.
The mini-latch plate and regular latch plate can
then be stored out of the way in the seat for
added convenience to open up utilization of the
storage areas behind the front seats when the
seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular
latch plate from its stowed position on the
seat.
Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle
Mini-Latch And Mini-Buckle Connected
2. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat
belt over the seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the
right head restraint.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the mini-latch plate into the
mini-buckle until you hear a “click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow
the seat belt to go around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on
the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the
risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so
that it is comfortable and not resting on your
neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack
in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle.
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 SAFETY
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular
latch plate into the center red slot on the
mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the
mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into
its stowed position.
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
First Row Center Lap Belt Operating
Instructions — If Equipped
The center seating position for the Quad Cab
and Crew Cab front seat has a lap belt only. To
buckle the lap belt, slide the latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a "click." To lengthen the
lap belt, tilt the latch plate and pull.
To remove slack, pull the loose end of the
webbing. Wear the lap belt snug against the
hips. Sit back and upright in the seat, then
adjust the seat belt as tightly as is comfortable.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and the
adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized
dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.
The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the
existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different
occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are
not properly connected when the seat belt
is used by an occupant, the seat belt will
not be able to provide proper restraint and
will increase the risk of injury in a collision.
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing
is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted,
follow the preceding procedure to detach
the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle,
untwist the webbing, and reattach the
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-
cally required in order to properly fit the
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the
Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed
can increase the risk of serious injury or
death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt
Extender when the lap belt is not long
enough and only use in the recommended
seating positions. Remove and store the
Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
SAFETY 229
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the
air bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR) — If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions may be equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is
used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to Ú page 251.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature
for each seating position.
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 SAFETY
(Continued)
Quad Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate
into the buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire seat belt is
extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Cinching Latchplate — Cinching Latchplate
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
SAFETY 231
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air
Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch
is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not
inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in colli-
sions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 SAFETY
(Continued)
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be
disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolsters
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
SAFETY 233
(Continued)
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has
multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less
severe collisions. A higher energy output is used
for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide
additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering
wheel because any such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually.
You may damage the air bags and you could
be injured because the air bags may no
longer be functional. The protective covers
for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 SAFETY
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts, in
addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
SAFETY 235
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG”.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force
to injure occupants if they are not belted and
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In
side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy
independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not
add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill
into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 SAFETY
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether deployment in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will
not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences
a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment
is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will
deploy the side air bags and seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protec-
tion in all collisions. They also help keep
you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be
properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
SAFETY 237
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
by-product of the process that generates the
non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These
airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irrita-
tion continues, see your doctor. If these parti-
cles settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt
pretensioners cannot protect you in another
collision. Have the air bags, seat belt
pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 SAFETY
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for
15 minutes from the intervention of the
Enhanced Accident Response System
Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the igni-
tion to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and
remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid
draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle
for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or
damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
headlights) after an accident, reset the system
by following the procedure described below. If
you have any doubt, contact an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident
Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start
after performing the reset procedure, the
vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer
to be inspected and to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System reset.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
SAFETY 239
(Continued)
Maintaining Your Air Bag System Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle
body structure, or add aftermarket side
steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci-
dentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 SAFETY
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint
Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached
to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
SAFETY 241
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint.
Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear-facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use
a belt-positioning booster seat until the
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat
belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a
rear support leg in this vehicle. The floor of
this vehicle is not designed to manage the
crash forces of this type of car seat. In a
crash, the support leg may not function as it
was designed by the car seat manufacturer,
and your child may be more severely injured
as a result.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
SAFETY 243
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no,” then the child still needs to use a booster
seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/
shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
position the seat belt on the child correctly.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can loosen
the child restraint attachments. Remove
the child restraint before adjusting the
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
SAFETY 245
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There
are two lower anchorages located at the back of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback
and one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used
with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Regular Cab LATCH Positions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 SAFETY
Crew Cab 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions Quad Cab LATCH Positions Crew Cab Full Bench LATCH Positions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
SAFETY 247
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH
anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing
or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorages from the outboard seating
positions?
Quad Cab and Crew Cab with full bench - No
Crew Cab Split Bench and Regular Cab - N/A
Regular Cab Front, Quad Cab or Crew Cab with
full bench rear seat: use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
Crew Cab with split bench rear seat: Child
restraints can be installed using the supplied
lower anchorages for the center seating
position.
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback.
They are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat
cushion.
Quad Cab/Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats Driver Side
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Regular Cab models have tether strap
anchorages behind the front center
and right seats. Quad Cab and Crew
Cab models have tether strap
anchorages located behind each of the rear
seats.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraints can be removed in every
rear seating position if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint Ú page 33.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
SAFETY 249
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers)
Crew Or Quad Cab Outboard Tether Anchorage
Crew Or Quad Cab Center Tether Anchorage With Head
Restraint In Raised Position
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Regular Cab, Quad Cab Or Crew Cab Full Bench
Rear Seat: No Lower Center LATCH Anchorages
Available
1 — Tether Anchor
2 — Tether Strap Hook
3 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This posi-
tion is not approved for installing child seats
using the LATCH attachments. You must use
the seat belt and tether anchor to install a
child seat in the center seating position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint.
Please refer to Ú page 250 for typical
installation instructions.
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 SAFETY
Crew Cab Split Bench Rear Seat: Center LATCH
Anchorages Available
If a child restraint installed in the center
position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle
for the outboard position, do not use that
outboard position. If a child seat in the center
position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that
outboard position.
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
To Install a LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the
instructions below. See Ú page 251 to check
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 256 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. Please
refer to Ú page 250 for typical installation
instructions.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
SAFETY 251
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 SAFETY
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with either a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate
or both. Both types of seat belts are designed to
keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around
the child restraint so that it is not necessary to
use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the
webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is
locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while
the webbing is pulled back into the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description on
Ú
page 229 for additional
information on ALR. The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seat belt
tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight
through a child restraint’s belt path.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
Quad Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Cinching Latchplate — Cinching Latchplate
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
SAFETY 253
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the Tether
Anchor with the seat belt to attach
a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a
forward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front
passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
Can the rear head restraints be
removed?
Yes
The rear head restraints can be
removed in every seating position if
they interfere with the installation
of the child restraint Ú page 33.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the
belt path of the child restraint?
Yes – Cinching Latch Plate
No – ALR
In positions with cinching latch
plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk
may be twisted up to 3 full turns.
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR
retractor.
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1.
For Crew And Quad Cab Models
Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position
to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
For Regular Cab Models
Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. Move the vehicle seat as
far rearward as possible to keep the child as
far from the passenger air bag as possible.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 256 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
SAFETY 255
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped:
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/
or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing
from the retractor to pass it through the belt
path of the child restraint. Do not twist the
belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too
close to the belt path opening of the child
restraint, you may have trouble tightening the
seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch
plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten
it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out, away from the child
restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to
complete the installation of the child restraint.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you
shorten the buckle, disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle, turn the buckle around one
half turn, and insert the latch plate into the
buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
restraint installation tight, try a different seating
position.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
Regular Cab Trucks:
In the regular cab truck, the top tether
anchorages are located behind the center and
right passenger seats. There is a plastic cover
over each anchorage. To attach the tether strap
of the child restraint:
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach
over the seat back, under the head
restraint and to the tether anchor directly
behind the seat.
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path between the anchorage and the
child seat. The tether strap should go
between the head restraint posts
underneath the head restraint. You may
need to adjust the head restraint to the
upward position to pass the tether strap
underneath the head restraint and between
its posts.
3. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach
the hook to the square opening in the sheet
metal. Tighten the tether strap according to
the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See Ú page 245 for the location of approved
tether anchorages in your vehicle.
1 — Tether Anchor
2 — Tether Strap Hook
3 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger
Front Air Bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger, including
a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
SAFETY 257
Quad or Crew Cab Trucks
The top tether anchorages in this vehicle are
tether strap loops located between the rear
glass and the back of the rear seat. There is a
tether strap loop located behind each seating
position. Follow the steps below to attach the
tether strap of the child restraint.
Right Or Left Outboard Seats:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach
between the rear seat and rear glass to
access the tether strap loop.
Head Restraint In Raised Position
Tether Strap Loop With Center Head Restraint In
Raised Position
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach
over the seat back, under the head
restraint, through the tether strap loop
behind the seat and over to the tether strap
loop behind the center seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head
restraint behind the child seat, though the
tether strap loop behind the seat and over
to the center tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop
4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap
loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 SAFETY
NOTE:
If there are child seats in both of the outboard
(left and right) seating positions, the tether
strap hooks of both child seats should be
connected to the center tether strap loop. This
is the correct way to tether two outboard child
seats.
Center Seat:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach
between the rear seat and rear glass to
access the tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In Raised
Position
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach
over the seat back, under the head
restraint, through the tether strap loop
behind the seat and over to the tether strap
loop behind either the right or left outboard
seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head
restraint behind the child seat, though the
tether strap loop behind the seat and over
to the right or left outboard tether strap
loop.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap
loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop
Installing Three Child Restraints:
1. Place a child restraint on each outboard
rear seat. Route the tether straps following
the directions for right and left seating
positions, above.
2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap
loop, but do not tighten the straps yet.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
SAFETY 259
(Continued)
3. Place a child restraint on the center rear
seat. Route the tether strap following the
directions for the center seating position,
above.
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap
loop.
5. Tighten the tether straps according to the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions,
tightening the right and left tether straps
before the center tether strap.
Outboard And Center Seating Positions Shown
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 SAFETY
(Continued)
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
position. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light
will illuminate with a single chime when a fault
with the Air Bag System has been detected. It
will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately Ú page 221.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the accelerator,
brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that
is securely attached using the floor mat
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle
in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or stack an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
SAFETY 261
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or
other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect
the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for
cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel bolts for
tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for
proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot
be properly attached and secured to your
vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, only
use a FCA approved floor mat for the specific
make, model, and year of your vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if
present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the
vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped
under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and
could cause a loss of vehicle control.
WARNING! (Continued)
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 SAFETY
Exhaust Gas
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force outside
air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
263
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located
on the upper switch bank just below the radio.
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the switch is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard
Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When leaving the vehicle to seek assistance,
the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to
operate even though the ignition is placed in the
OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning
Flashers may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Mirror
7
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an
ASSIST and a SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber Ú page 360.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only func-
tion if you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network. Other
Uconnect services will only be operable if
your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active
and you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you’ll be connected to someone who can
help. Roadside Assistance will know what
vehicle you’re driving and its location. Addi-
tional fees may apply for roadside Assis-
tance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care –
In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for
Radio, Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview
Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To
cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the
cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons on the Rearview Mirror will
turn green once a connection to a SOS
operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and
a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call
system may transmit the following
important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system
to determine if additional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM
Guardian™ features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and
SiriusXM Guardian™ services when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 265
(Continued)
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS
operator, the SOS operator may be able
to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional help is
needed. Once the SOS operator opens a
voice connection with the vehicle’s SOS
Call system, the operator should be able
to speak with you or other vehicle occu-
pants and hear sounds occurring in the
vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system
will attempt to remain connected with the
SOS operator until the SOS operator
terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM
Guardian™ features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and
SiriusXM Guardian™ services when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from an Emergency Services
Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s operable network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable
network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and
GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
aftermarket electrical equipment to the
vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system
to fail, never add aftermarket equipment
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to
fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to help
protect you.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in
Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS
system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located between
the ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously
illuminate red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
“Vehicle device requires service. Please
contact an authorized dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware are damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are
unavailable or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module
turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant
Restraint Control system immediately.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 267
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call
system to function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service
that can immediately connect you with help in
the event that your vehicle’s airbags deploy.
Please refer to your provided radio supplement
for complete information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the Uconnect and SiriusXM
Guardian™ features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect features and
SiriusXM Guardian™ services when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
7
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Shift the transmission into Park (P).
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK LOCATION
The jack and jack tools are stored under the
front passenger seat.
REMOVAL OF JACK AND TOOLS
To access the jack and jack tools, you must
remove the plastic access cover located on the
side of the front passenger’s seat. To remove
the cover, pull the front part of the cover
(closest to the front of the seat) toward you to
release a locking tab. Once the front of the
cover is loose, slide the cover toward the front
of the seat until it is free from the seat frame.
Jack Access Cover
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 269
(Continued)
Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing
bolt counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and
then slide the assembly out from under the seat.
Jack And Tools
Release the tool bag straps from the jack and
remove tools from bag.
Jack And Tool Bag
There are two ways to assemble the tools:
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
Assembled For Jack Operation
Assembled For Jack Operation
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Extension 2
3 — Extension 3
4 — Extension 4
CAUTION!
The lug wrench can only be attached to
extension 2.
When attaching the tool to the winch mech-
anism be sure the large flared end opening
on extension 4 is positioned correctly over
the winch mechanism adjusting nut.
Damage to the lug wrench, extensions and
winch mechanism may occur from
improper tool assembly.
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Extension 2
3 — Extension 3
4 — Extension 4
5 — Extension With Jack Hook
CAUTION! (Continued)
7
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
REMOVING THE SPARE TIRE
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to
jack up the truck. Attach the lug wrench to
the extension tubes with the curved angle
facing away from the vehicle.
2. Remove the protective cover over the
access hole for the winch mechanism by
sliding the cover upward.
Access Hole Cover Location
3. Insert the extension tube through the
access hole between the lower tailgate and
the top of the fascia/bumper and into the
winch mechanism tube.
Winch Mechanism Tube
Inserting The Extension Tubes Into The Access Hole
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle counter-
clockwise until the spare tire is on the
ground with enough cable slack to allow you
to pull it out from under the vehicle.
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall
them in the original carrier and location.
While driving you may experience abrupt
stopping, rapid acceleration or sharp turns. A
loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects in
the vehicle may move around with force,
resulting in serious injury.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 271
(Continued)
5. Pull the spare tire out from under the
vehicle to gain access to the spare tire
retainer.
Removing The Spare Tire
6. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of
the cable.
Gaining Access To The Retainer
7. Pull the retainer through the center of the
wheel.
Pulling The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the extension tubes only. Use of an air wrench
or other power tools is not recommended and
can damage the winch.
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
7
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from
the stored location.
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel nuts
(but do not remove), by turning them
counterclockwise one turn while the wheel
is still on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Connect the jack handle driver to the
extension, then to the lug wrench.
Assembled Jack And Tools
4. Placement for the front and rear jacking
locations are critical. See below images for
proper jacking locations.
NOTE:
Keep the jack and tools aligned with raising the
vehicle.
Jack / Extensions Placement
Front Jacking Location
There is a jack location indicator on the rear
portion of the front lower control arm.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 273
Front Lifting Point
When changing a front wheel, place the
scissor jack under the rear portion of the
lower control arm as shown below.
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
Operate the jack using the extension with
jack hook and the lug wrench. The exten-
sion tubes may be used but are not re-
quired.
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the
extension with jack hook to the jack and
connect the extension tubes. Access the
rear jacking location from behind the rear
tire. Place the jack under the axle between
the wheel and the shock bracket with the
extension with jack hook extending to the
rear.
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise
the vehicle until the wheel just clears the
surface.
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make
sure that the jack will not damage
surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack
position as required.
7
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Remove the lug nuts and pull the wheel off.
Install the spare wheel and lug nuts with the
cone shaped end of the lug nuts toward the
wheel. Hand tighten the lug nuts with the
vehicle lifted. To avoid the risk of forcing the
vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the
lug nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.
7. Lower the vehicle to the ground and finish
tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench handle for increased leverage.
Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each lug nut has been tightened twice
Ú page 347. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a
service station.
8. If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel
center cap, install the cap and remove the
wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or
aluminum wheel center caps on the spare
wheel. This may result in cap damage.
9. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
Stow the replaced tire, and secure the jack
and tools in the proper location.
10. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE:
Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
TO STOW THE FLAT OR SPARE
1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is
facing upward and toward the rear of the
vehicle for convenience in checking the
spare tire inflation. Slide the wheel retainer
through the center of the wheel.
Reinstalling The Retainer
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop, could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 275
2. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of
the cable and position it properly across the
wheel opening.
Pushing The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
And Positioning It
3. Remove the extension with the hook and
reattach the short extension 5. Attach the
lug wrench to the extension tubes with the
curved angle facing away from the vehicle
Ú page 268. Insert the extension tubes
through the access hole between the lower
tailgate and the top of the fascia/bumper
and into the winch mechanism tube.
Raising The Spare Tire
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise
until the wheel is drawn into place against
the underside of the vehicle. Continue to
rotate until you feel the winch mechanism
slip, or click three or four times. It cannot be
overtightened. Push against the tire several
times to ensure it is firmly in place.
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or
other power tools is not recommended and can
damage the winch.
REINSTALLING THE JACK AND TOOLS
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by
turning the jack turn-screw counter-
clockwise until the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tool bag. Make sure
the lug wrench is under the jack near the
jack turn-screw.
7
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jack And Tool Bag
3. Secure the tool bag straps to the jack.
Jack And Tools Tied
4. Place the jack and tools in the storage
position holding the jack by the jack
turn-screw, slip the jack and tools under the
seat so that the bottom slot engages into
the fastener on the floor.
NOTE:
Ensure that the jack slides into the front hold
down location.
5. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the
floor pan. Reinstall the plastic cover.
Jack And Tools
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall
them in the original carrier and location.
While driving you may experience abrupt
stopping, rapid acceleration or sharp turns. A
loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects in
the vehicle may move around with force,
resulting in serious injury.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 277
(Continued)
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front
of the engine compartment, behind the left
headlight assembly.
Battery Location
NOTE:
The positive battery post may be covered with a
protective cap if equipped. Lift up on the cap to
gain access to the positive battery post. Do not
jump off fuses. Only jump directly off positive
post which has a positive (+) symbol on or
around the post.
Positive (+) Battery Post
Follow the below steps to prepare for jump
starting:
1. When using another vehicle to jump start
the battery, park the vehicle within the
jumper cables’ reach, apply the parking
brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective
cover over the remote positive (+) battery
post.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
7
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off
positive post.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground. A
“ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as
an accessory bracket or large bolt. The
ground must be away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the
disconnection procedure below.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not connect jumper cable to any of the
fuses on the positive battery terminal. The
resulting electrical current will blow the fuse.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 279
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the
jumper cable from the engine ground of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post
of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and
charging system inspected at an authorized
dealer.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
NOTE:
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase
the engine idle speed while preventing
vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
7
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
To push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such
as a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release
is available.
Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park
Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal
while seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake, if possible.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the Manual Park Release access
cover, which is located to the lower left of
the steering column.
Manual Park Release Access Cover
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and
call for service.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying
the parking brake before activating the
Manual Park Release. In addition, you should
be seated in the driver’s seat with your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual
Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll
away if it is not secured by the parking brake,
or by proper connection to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury
or death for those in or around the vehicle.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 281
4. Behind the Manual Park Release access
cover is the orange tether strap. Pull the
tether strap out as far as it will go, then
release it. The tether and lever will remain
outside of the trim panel and the
transmission should now be in NEUTRAL,
allowing the vehicle to be moved.
Manual Park Release Tether
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal
while seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Pull the tether strap out again, then release
it.
3. Allow the tether strap to retract with the
lever back to its original position.
Manual Park Release Tether
4. Verify that the transmission is in PARK.
5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully
and re-install the access cover.If the access
cover cannot be reinstalled, repeat step 1
through 4.
NOTE:
When the lever is locked in the released posi-
tion the access cannot be reinstalled.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Then
shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R), while gently pressing the
accelerator. Use the least amount of
accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain
the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels
or racing the engine.
7
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE(D) or REVERSE (R).
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF switch to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF”
mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 210.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC
OFF switch again to restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or
transmission failure during prolonged efforts
to free a stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do
not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph
(24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 283
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed as described on Ú page 158.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment per FCA US LLC
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State
and local laws regarding vehicles under tow
must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC
mode.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's
battery is discharged, find Instructions on
shifting the transmission out of PARK in order to
move the vehicle Ú page 280.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground 2WD Models 4WD Models
Flat Tow NONE
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL (N)
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance
(6–speed transmission)
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance
(8–speed transmission)
Ú page 158
• Automatic Transmission in PARK
(P)
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
7
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TWO-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA recommends towing your vehicle with all
four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (with rear wheels ON the ground) under
the following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N).
Instructions on shifting the 8–speed trans-
mission to NEUTRAL (N) when the engine is
OFF Ú page 280.
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles
(24 km) for 6–speed transmission, or
30 miles (48 km) for 8–speed transmission.
If the transmission is not operable, or the
vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or farther than 15 miles (24 km) for
6–speed transmission, or 30 miles (48 km) for
8–speed transmission, tow with the rear wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow
the vehicle on a flatbed, or with the front wheels
raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly, or
(when using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer
to hold the front wheels in the straight position)
with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels
ON the ground.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA recommends towing with all wheels OFF
the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle
raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe engine and/
or transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a front or rear
wheel lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 285
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency
tow hooks.
Front Tow Hooks Location
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk
of damage to the vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact
Ú page 238.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle Ú page 239.
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious
injury or death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with
tow hooks. Tow straps may become disen-
gaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to
rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not
use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or
highway towing. You could damage your
vehicle.
7
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, and extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the
“Oil Change Required” message is displayed.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check tire pressure and look for unusual
wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign
of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the
oil indicator system turns on
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder and fill as needed
Check function of all interior and exterior
lights
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 287
MAINTENANCE PLAN
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change the oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid if equipped with dipstick.
Inspect the brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace engine air cleaner filter if necessary.
Inspect and replace the Evaporative System Fresh Air Filter as necessary, replacement may be more frequent if vehicle is operated in extreme dusty
conditions.
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle
surfaces. If gear oil leakage is
suspected, check the fluid level. If
using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing,
change axle fluid.
X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as
necessary.
X X X X X X X
Adjust parking brake as necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 289
Flush and replace the engine coolant
at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change
for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
X X
Change the transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 5 — Battery
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 291
5.7L ENGINE
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
2 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5 — Battery
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as
every fuel stop. The best time to check the
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the
low end of the range and MAX at the high end
of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at
the MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the cross-
hatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is
at the low end of the dipstick range will raise the
oil level to the high end of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood
and should be checked for fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or
towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will
help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information
can be found on most washer fluid containers.
After the engine has warmed up, operate the
defroster for a few minutes to reduce the
possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on
the cold windshield. Windshield washer solution
used with water as directed on the container,
aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point
to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to
paint or trim.
MAINTENANCE -FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
maintenance-free battery. You will never have
to add water, and periodic maintenance is not
required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling
or working around the washer solution.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 293
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water Ú page 276.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the nega-
tive cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the
pressures generated by these machines is
such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils
that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395.
NOTE:
Hemi engines (5.7L) at times can tick right after
startup and then quiet down after approxi-
mately 30 seconds. This is normal and will not
harm the engine. This characteristic can be
caused by short drive cycles. For example, if the
vehicle is started then shut off after driving a
short distance. Upon restarting, you may experi-
ence a ticking sound. Other causes could be if
the vehicle is unused for an extended period of
time, incorrect oil, extended oil changes or
extended idling. If the engine continues to tick
or if the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes
on, see the nearest authorized dealer.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends API
Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against the addition of any additives (other than
leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil
is an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 295
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact
an authorized dealer, service station or
governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely
discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be
used for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality Mopar certified filters should be
used.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 287.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar certified
filters should be used.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or
debris you should change your engine air
cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Release the spring clips from the engine air
cleaner cover.
Engine Air Cleaner Cover
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal
injury.
1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp
2 — Air Hose
3 — Spring Clips
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. Lift the engine air cleaner cover to access
the engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from
the housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the engine air cleaner
filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner cover onto the
housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the engine
air cleaner cover to the housing assembly.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air
conditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Cover
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for
your air conditioning system. Some unap-
proved refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
Refer to Warranty Information Book, for
further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 297
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a — If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an
ozone-friendly substance. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
Polyalkylene Glycol (PAG) compressor oil and
refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using
recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Filter Replacement
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 287.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove
all contents.
2. With the glove compartment door open,
remove the glove compartment tension
tether and tether clip by sliding the clip
toward the face of the glove compartment
door. Lift the clip out of glove compartment
door and release into dash panel.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. There are glove compartment travel stops
on both sides of the glove compartment
door, push inward on both sides of the glove
compartment to release the glove
compartment travel stops.
Glove Compartment
4. Disengage the glove compartment door
from its hinges by opening the glove
compartment past the travel stop and
pulling it toward you.
5. Remove the filter cover by pushing in on the
finger tabs on each end of the filter cover.
Filter Cover
Finger Tabs
Finger Tab
6. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it
straight out of the housing.
Cabin Air Filter
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Door
3 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 299
7. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on
the filter pointing toward the floor. When
installing the filter cover, press on each end
until you hear an audible click.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment on the
hinges.
9. Pull the tension tether outward and reinstall
the glove compartment past the travel stops
by pushing in on the glove compartment
sides.
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully
engaged.
10. Reattach the glove compartment tension
tether by inserting the tether clip in the
glove compartment and sliding the clip
away from the face of the glove
compartment door.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across the ribbed surface of a
belt from rib to rib, are considered normal.
These are not a reason to replace the belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across)
are not normal. Any belt with cracks running
along a rib must be replaced. Also have the belt
replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords,
or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has sepa-
rated from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between
two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken (note: identify and correct
problem before new belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or
rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in
operation)
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow
to indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result
in the need to replace it more often.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory
drive belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could
be injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a compe-
tent mechanic.
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically with a lithium based grease, such
as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess
oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch release mechanism, and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality
lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder
Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies
depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. Poor performance of blades may be
present with chattering, marks, water lines or
wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,
replace the affected wiper blade or arm with a
new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper blade
or arm that is damaged.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 301
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the
full up position.
Windshield Wiper Arm And Blade
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the locking tab.
Wiper Locking Assembly
3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away
from the arm and use one finger push the
release tab toward the wiper arm.
Wiper Disengaging
4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the
base of the wiper arm.
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Release Tab
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove
the wiper blade from the wiper arm by
holding the wiper arm with one hand and
separating the wiper blade from the wiper
arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade down toward the base of the wiper
arm and away from the J hook in the end of
the wiper arm).
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on
the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper
locking tab open.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper
assembly into the hook on the tip of the arm
through the opening in the wiper blade
under the locking tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
the wiper arm until it is latched
(engagement will be accompanied by an
audible click). Fold down the latch release
tab and snap it into its locked position.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or
oil change. Replace as required.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. To avoid breathing CO see
Ú page 262.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do
not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 303
Under normal operating conditions, the
catalytic converter will not require
maintenance. However, it is important to keep
the engine properly tuned to ensure proper
catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching
odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's
specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-
mission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition
components disconnected or removed, such
as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri-
ously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can
result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
operating condition. In the event of engine
malfunction, particularly involving engine
misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
open a cooling system pressure cap when the
radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze)
protection every 12 months (before the onset of
freezing weather, where applicable). If the
engine coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance,
the system should be drained, flushed and
refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the
A/C condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean
by gently spraying water from a garden hose
vertically down the face of the A/C condenser (if
equipped) or the back of the radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and
tightness of the connection at the coolant
recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks.
DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant (antifreeze) properly. Failure to fill these
systems properly could lead to severe internal
engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be
added to the system please contact an autho-
rized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 287.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 353.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protec-
tion. OAT engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or
any “globally compatible” coolant. If a
non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 305
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant.
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant
is not recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for
using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032. When adding
engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an
authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/
engine coolant solution. The use of lower
quality water will reduce the amount of corro-
sion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in
the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed
in an emergency, have a authorized dealer
drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant will return to the radiator
from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery
tank (if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
is a regulated substance requiring proper
disposal. Check with your local authorities to
determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain
in puddles on the ground, clean up any ground
spills immediately. If ingested by a child or pet,
seek emergency assistance immediately.
Checking Coolant Level
With the engine off and cold, the level of the
engine coolant should be between the ADD and
SAFE range on the dipstick.
To check the coolant level:
1. Open the coolant reservoir.
2. Lift and remove the plastic dipstick from the
reservoir neck.
Coolant Reservoir Dipstick
3. Check the coolant level on the dipstick.
The radiator normally remains completely full,
so there is no need to remove the radiator cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze)
freeze point or replacing engine coolant. Advise
your service attendant of this. As long as the
engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to
the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compart-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307
(Continued)
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of
the coolant expansion bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which
contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever
necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-
mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-
factory engine cooling performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be
inspected periodically Ú page 287.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the brake master cylinder
should be checked whenever the vehicle is
serviced, or immediately if the brake system
warning light is on. If necessary, add fluid to bring
level within the designated marks on the side of
the reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be
sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing cap. With disc brakes, fluid level
can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
Brake fluid level should be checked when pads
are replaced. If the brake fluid is abnormally low,
check the system for leaks
Ú
page 355.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid Ú page 355. Using the wrong
type of brake fluid can severely damage
your brake system and/or impair its perfor-
mance. The proper type of brake fluid for
your vehicle is also identified on the original
factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid
that has been in a tightly closed container.
Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap
secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open
container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or
prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
using any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore,
do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. The only exception to this policy is
the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks
in transmissions. Avoid using transmission
sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required, therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service
tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not
required. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission
performance and life. Use only the
recommended transmission fluid Ú page 355.
It is important to maintain the transmission fluid
at the correct level using the recommended
fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage your
transmission components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may
cause deterioration in transmission shift
quality and/or torque converter shudder
Ú page 355.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 309
(Continued)
REAR AXLE AND 4X4 FRONT DRIVING
A
XLE FLUID LEVEL
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks
are not required. When the vehicle is serviced
for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the
axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil
leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. This
inspection should be made with the vehicle in a
level position.
The fluid level should be even with the bottom
of the fill hole (within 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) of edge
of hole) for the front axle and rear axle.
Drain And Refill
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 287.
Lubricant Selection
For further information Ú page 355.
NOTE:
The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differ-
ential components. Operation of the vehicle in
water, as may be encountered in some
off-highway types of service, will require
draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
Limited-Slip Differentials
Rear axles equipped with a Limited Slip
Differential require that 5 oz. (148 ml) Mopar
Limited Slip Additive be added to the gear
lubricant Ú page 355. The Mopar Limited Slip
Additive should be added to the gear lubricant
whenever a fluid change is made to an axle
equipped with a Limited Slip Differential.
NOTE:
When refilling an axle with a Limited Slip Differ-
ential, (which requires a Limited Slip Additive),
the Limited Slip Additive should be added
before the gear lubricant is added to insure
proper additive fill.
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing the
filler plug. The fluid level should be to the
bottom edge of the filler plug hole (or at least
within 1/8 inch of the bottom) with the vehicle
in a level position.
Drain And Refill
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 287.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the recommended fluid Ú page 355.
FUSES
General Information
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery
discharge.
Blade Fuses
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This
center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses,
relays, and circuit breakers. A description of
each fuse and component may be stamped on
the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of
each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that
corresponds to the following chart.
Power Distribution Center Location
Power Distribution Center
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
If it is necessary to wash the engine
compartment, take care not to directly hit the
fuse box, and the windshield wiper motors
with water.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse
element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 311
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F01 80 Amp Black – Rad Fan Control Module – If Equipped
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Rad Fan – If Equipped
F05 40 Amp Green – Compressor for Air Suspension – If Equipped
F06 40 Amp Green – Antilock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control Pump
F07 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid
F08
20 Amp Blue (1500 LD/
Cummins Diesel)
40 Amp Green
–
–
Emissions Diesel – If Equipped
Aux Relay Output- Special Services Only
F09
40 Amp Green (Special
Services Vehicle &
Cummins Diesel)
–
Diesel Fuel Heater – If Equipped / Aux Relay Output-
Special Services Only
F10 40 Amp Green – Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2
F10 50 Amp Red –
Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2 – If Equipped with
Stop/Start
F11 30 Amp Pink – Integrated Trailer Brake Module – If Equipped
F12 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #3 / Power Locks
F13 40 Amp Green – Blower Motor
F14 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #4 / Exterior Lighting
F15
–
40 Amp Green
–
–
Spare Fuse
Special Services Only
F16 30 Amp Pink – Smart Bar – If Equipped
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F19
20 Amp Blue
(1500 LD Diesel)
30 Amp Pink
(Cummins Diesel)
– SCR – If Equipped
F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F21 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control Module
F22
20 Amp Blue
30 Amp Pink (Cummins
Diesel)
– Engine Control Module
F23 30 Amp Pink – Body Controller #1 / Interior Lighting
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F25 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F26 30 Amp Pink – Antilock Brakes / Stability Control Module / Valves
F28 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights – If Equipped
F29 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Parking Lights – If Equipped
F30 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle
F31
30 Amp Pink
(1500 LD Diesel)
– Urea Heater Control – If Equipped
F32 20 Amp Blue – Special Services Vehicle Only
F33 20 Amp Blue – Special Services Vehicle Only
F34 30 Amp Pink – Vehicle System Interface Module #2 – If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 313
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof – If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster – If Equipped
F37 30 Amp Pink –
Cummins Diesel Fuel Heater #2 – If Equipped / Aux Relay
Output – Special Services Vehicle Only
F38 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter 115 Volt AC – If Equipped
F39 20 Amp Blue – Power Outlet – Special Services Only
F41 – 10 Amp Red Active Grille Shutter – If Equipped
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F46 – 10 Amp Red Upfitter – If Equipped
F49 – 10 Amp Red Instrument Panel Cluster (Except Fleet Vehicles)
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Control Module – If Equipped
F51 – 10 Amp Red
Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition (Instrument Panel
Cluster – Fleet Vehicles Only)
F52 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights - If Equipped
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals - If Equipped
F55 – 25 Amp Clear Spot Light – If Equipped
F56 – 15 Amp Blue Additional Diesel Content - If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Transmission
F58 – 20 Amp Yellow Spare Fuse
F59 – 10 Amp Red SCR Relay – If Equipped
F60 – 15 Amp Blue Underhood Lamp/TCM
F61 –
10 Amp Red (1500 LD
Diesel & Cummins Diesel)
PM Sensor – If Equipped
F62 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Cummins Diesel)
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors / Powertrain
F65 – – Spare Fuse
F66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof / Passenger Window Switches / Rain Sensor
F67 – 10 Amp Red CD / DVD / Bluetooth® Hands-free Module – If Equipped
F69 – 15 Amp Blue Mod SCR 12 Volt (Cummins Diesel) – If Equipped
F70 – 30 Amp Green Fuel Pump Motor
F71 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier - If Equipped
F72 – – –
F73 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Transfer Pump (HD Only) – If Equipped
F74 –
20 Amp Yellow (Gas Engine
& 1500 LD Diesel)
Brake Vacuum Pump Gas/Diesel – If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 315
F75 – 10 Amp Red Coolant Temperature Valve Actuator
F76 – 10 Amp Red Antilock Brakes / Electronic Stability Control - If Equipped
F77 – 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Disconnect Module
F78
– 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module / Electric Power Steering
F79 – 15 Amp Blue Clearance Lights
F80 – 10 Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener / Compass
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn / Stop Lights - If Equipped
F82 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module / Cruise Control
F83 – – Spare Fuse
F84 – 15 Amp Blue Switch Bank / Instrument Cluster
F85 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F86 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F87 – 10 Amp Red
Air Suspension – If Equipped / Trailer Tow / Steering
Column Control Module
F88 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster
F90/F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (Rear Seats) Customer Selectable
F93 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter - If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F94 – 10 Amp Red Shifter / Transfer Case Module
F95 – 10 Amp Red Rear Camera / Park Assist - If Equipped
F96 – 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Heater Switch - If Equipped
F97 – 25 Amp Clear Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel – If Equipped
F98 – 25 Amp Clear Front Heated Seats – If Equipped
F99 – 10 Amp Red Climate Control
F100 – 10 Amp Red Upfitters – If Equipped
F101 – 15 Amp Blue
Electrochromatic Mirror / Smart High Beams –
If Equipped
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlets (Instrument Panel / Center Console)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indi-
cated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 317
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Overhead Console Lamps TS 212–9
Dome Lamp 7679
NOTE:
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Base Quad Headlamp – Low Beam H11LL
Base Quad Headlamp – High Beam 9005LL
Front Turn Signal Lamp (Base Quad Headlamp) 3157NA
Premium Bi Halogen Projector Headlamp - Low Beam 9005Sl+
Premium Bi Halogen Projector Headlamp - High Beam 9005LL
Front Turn Signal Lamp (Premium Headlamp) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Fog Lamp (Horizontal shape) 9145
Fog Lamp (Vertical shape) 9006
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Base Quad / Premium Bi-Halogen: Low Beam
Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, Front Park
And Turn — If Equipped
See below steps to replace.
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the six plastic push-in fasteners
that secure the upper radiator seal to the
grille support and both fender ledges.
4. Remove the two plastic push-in rivets that
secure the upper radiator seal to the
radiator.
5. Remove the upper radiator seal from the
vehicle.
6. Remove the two headlamp assembly
attachment screws.
Headlamp Assembly Attachment Screw Locations
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 921K
Rear Cargo Lamp 921
LED Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)/Cargo Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Base Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp 3157K
Premium Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Premium Backup Lamp 7440/W21W
Backup Lamp 921
Rear License Plate Lamp 194
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 319
7. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of
the front wheel, remove the fastener, and
lift the cover over the access hole in the
front of the wheel house splash shield.
Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained
through this access hole.
8. Reach through the access hole of the wheel
house splash shield and lift the slide lock
upward far enough to disengage it from the
lock post on the back of the front lamp unit
housing.
Slide Lock
9. Remove the headlamp assembly. Grab the
outboard edge of the lamp and pull it
straight forward to disengage the ball stud
from the plastic grommet.
Headlamp Screw Locations
10. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors
from the bulb socket.
Bulb Location
Bulb Location
11. Replace bulb(s) as necessary.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened
bulb life will result.
Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type
may overheat and cause damage to the
lamp, the bulb socket, or the lamp wiring.
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
There are access covers over both headlamp
bulb access holes in the quad front lamp unit
housing (if equipped). These covers MUST be
reinstalled after the bulb has been replaced.
Fog Lamps — If Equipped
See below steps to replace.
1. Reach under and behind the front fascia/
bumper to access the back of the front fog
lamp housing.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness
connector from the fog lamp bulb.
Fog Lamp Bulb
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock the bulb from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
Rear Tail / Stop, Turn Signal And Backup
Lamps
See below steps to replace.
1. Remove the two screws that pass through
the bed sheet metal.
Tail Lamp Screw Locations
2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward
far enough to unsnap the two receptacles
on the outboard side of the lamp housing
from the two plastic snap post retainers in
the outer box side panel.
Pulling Out The Tail Lamp
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors
from the bulb socket.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb
life will result.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 321
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise a
quarter turn to unlock it from the housing.
Wiring Harness Connector
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
6. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb
and housing.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
With Cargo Lamp
See below steps to replace.
1. Remove the two screws holding the
housing/lens to the body as shown.
CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations
2. Separate the connector holding the housing
and wiring harness to the body.
CHMSL Connector Location
3. Turn the desired bulb socket a quarter turn
and remove the socket and bulb from
housing.
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the
socket.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb
life will result.
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
Inside Bulb: Center High Mounted Stop
Lamp
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of
bulbs and housing.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or
“S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
31x10.5 R15 LT.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb
life will result.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 323
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 325
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white
sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black
sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 327
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in Vehicle Loading
Ú page 145.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing Ú page 145.
To determine the maximum loading conditions
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples
on how to calculate total load, cargo/
luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table
is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load carry
capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 329
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping
distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload
them.
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a
comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a
jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgment when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve
stem.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 331
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build up or your tire
pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is
very important. Increased tire pressure and
reduced vehicle loading may be required for
high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an
authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire
pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to
be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a Run Flat tire is changed
after driving with underinflated tire condition,
please replace the TPM sensor as it is not
designed to be reused when driven under Run
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
The TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving
the vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended to drive a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the Run Flat mode.
For more information Ú page 217.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping.
For further information Ú page 281.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
For further information Ú page 333.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 333
(Continued)
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These
abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed
Ú
page 332. Refer to the
Tire and Loading Information placard or the
Vehicle Certification Label for the size
designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 323.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you
ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s
specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change suspen-
sion dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and
have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with
load ratings approved for your vehicle.
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer
and odometer readings.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too
fast for conditions also creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 335
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer
for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 152.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than
one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with a compact or limited use
temporary spare installed. Damage to the
vehicle may result.
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary
emergency use only. You can identify if your
vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump
before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the collapsible spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically
for the collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel.
This label contains the driving limitations for
this spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it
is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 337
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent
corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from
the brake components. This activity will remove
the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
the following snow traction devices are
recommended. Follow these recommendations
to guard against damage:
Snow traction device must be of proper size
for the tire, as recommended by the snow
traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use
with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table below for the recom-
mended tire size, axle and snow traction
device:
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.
They will permanently damage this finish and
such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that
is required to maintain this finish.
4x2 (2WD)
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond
tire profile or equivalent)
Tradesman Rear P265/70R17 S Class
SLT Rear
P265/70R17
17 x 7.0 x 25.4 mm
S Class
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 339
(Continued)
4x4 (4WD)
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond
tire profile or equivalent)
Tradesman Rear P265/70R17 S Class
SLT Rear
P265/70R17
17 x 7.0 x 25.4 mm
S Class
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose
control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension compo-
nents, it is important that only traction devices
in good condition are used. Broken devices can
cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle imme-
diately if noise occurs that could indicate
device breakage. Remove the damaged parts
of the device before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not
require retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION! (Continued)
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
and wet traction levels and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this chapter
for the proper maintenance intervals. More
frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The
reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some
directional tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 341
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than
three weeks, we recommend that you take the
following steps to minimize the drain on your
vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out
of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or
more, run the air conditioning system at idle
for about five minutes in the fresh air and
high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
Stone and gravel impact
Insects, tree sap and tar
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass
headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive
material to clean the lenses.
Tri-Fold Soft Tonneau Cover Care
For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri-Fold
Tonneau cover, use Mopar Whitewall & Vinyl
Top Cleaner and Mopar Leather and Vinyl
Conditioner/Protectant.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 343
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Use
precautions to not scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
Bumper Care
The customer is responsible to clean and
maintain the chrome components of the
vehicle. Washing away road debris and salt
using an automotive soap. Bumpers should be
cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap
and water to maintain their luster and to
prevent corrosion.
Your bumpers are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff
brush. They can stain or damage the protective
coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a
bristle brush, metal polishes, or oven
cleaner. These products may damage the
bumper’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar
Chrome Cleaner, or equivalent is recom-
mended.
Avoid products or automatic car washes
that use acidic solutions, strong alkaline
additives, or harsh brushes. Many after-
market cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the bumper’s protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car
wash soap, Mopar Chrome Cleaner, or
equivalent is recommended.
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
Spray-On Bedliner – If Equipped
During ownership, the shine and luster of the
Spray-On Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road
dirt, heavy-duty hauling and hard water stains.
Weathering and Ultra-Violet (UV) exposure will
lead to fading, dulling, and loss of gloss over
time.
To help maintain the appearance of your
Spray-On Bedliner, the manufacturer
recommends you periodically rinse all loose dirt
from your truck bed and clean your truck at
least twice per year using the Mopar Spray-On
Bedliner Conditioner available at your local
authorized dealer.
To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your
Spray-On Bedliner, Follow The Steps Below:
1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to
remove any loose dirt and debris.
2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water, and
clean truck bed with a soft cloth or brush.
3. Rinse bedliner with water.
4. Once dry, apply a small amount of Mopar
Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner to a moist
towel or sponge and wipe over the entire
surface of the truck bedliner.
Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to
many different types of chemicals (including
gasoline, oil, hydraulic fluids) for short periods
of time. If a spill occurs on your Spray-On
Bedliner, rinse the truck out as soon as possible
to avoid permanent damage.
Repairing The Spray-On Bedliner
While extremely tough, it is possible to damage
a Spray-On Bedliner. One common condition is
when loading a heavy pallet and dragging that
pallet across the floor of the bed. If a nail or
sharp point is exposed under the weight of the
pallet a scratch or tear is possible. While not
covered by your new vehicle warranty, a
cosmetic fix to cover the metal exposed by the
scratch is required. To repair a tear or gouge,
follow the directions provided in the Mopar
Quick Repair Kit.
WARNING!
Do not use silicon-based protection products
to clean your bedliner. Silicon-based products
can become slippery and may result in
personal injury.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 345
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the
following manner:
Remove as much of the stain as possible by
blotting with a clean, dry towel.
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp
towel.
For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or
a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth
and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other
form of protectants on Stain Repel products.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a
soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
NOTE:
If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper
turning loop for soiling. If soiling is present,
clean with a wet soft cloth until all residue is
removed.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
8
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used,
wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a
soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and should
be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft
cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery
with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils,
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-
mends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied
on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated
surfaces of the interior may cause perma-
nent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather seats, as damage to the seat may
result.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
347
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the
instrument panel, visible through the
windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
If power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the
engine off), the brakes will still function.
However, you will experience a substantial
increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses
normal braking capability, the remaining
system will still function with some loss of
overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and activation of the “Brake Warning
Light” and the “ABS Warning Light” (if equipped)
during brake use.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended
lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or
oil before tightening.
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Torque
Lug Nut/
Bolt Type
**Lug
Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
130
Ft-Lbs
(176 N·m)
Cone
M14 x
1.50
22 mm
9
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/
bolt (do not insert it halfway).
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly tightened.
Four And Five Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Pattern
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and
may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 349
3.6L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
excellent fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality
unleaded “Regular” gasoline having an octane
rating of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method.
The use of higher octane “Premium” gasoline will
not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in
these engines.
5.7L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality
unleaded gasoline having an octane range of
87 to 89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method.
The use of 89 octane “Plus” gasoline is
recommended for optimum performance and
fuel economy.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated
gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle
emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is
recommended. Properly blended reformulated
gasoline will provide improved performance
and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish
removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE /OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
Methanol, or gasoline containing more than
15% Ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% Ethanol (E-15).
9
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing Methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on
Poor engine performance
Poor cold start and cold drivability
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 351
(Continued)
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) I N
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic
additive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The
manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the
gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and
California reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
control system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a
pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of Methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
bility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
9
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 26 Gallons 98 Liters
Regular Cab Longbed/Crew Quad Cab Models (Optional) 32 Gallons 121 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7L Engine 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System
3.6L Engine 13.7 Quarts 13 Liters
5.7L Engine 18.3 Quarts 17.3 Liters
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 353
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil,
and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil meeting MS-6395 is
not available.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil,
and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar Engine Oil
Filter is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36
Filter Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method,
0-15% Ethanol.
9
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or
anti-rust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant
(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
CAUTION! (Continued)
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 355
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend you use Mobil LT.
Front Axle
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE
75W-85.
Rear Axle
We recommend you use Mopar Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-90
(MS-A0160). Limited-Slip Rear Axles require the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml)
Mopar Limited Slip Additive (MS-10111).
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3.
9
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by
the warranty. Discuss additional charges with
the service manager. Keep a maintenance log
of your vehicle's service history. This can often
provide a clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
(additional charges may apply). If you need a
rental, it is advisable to make these
arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to
be happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your
vehicle the best, and are most concerned that
you get prompt and high quality service. FCA US
LLC’s authorized dealers have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer’s service manager first. If for
some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to
the general manager or owner of the authorized
dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to
resolve the concern, you may contact the FCA
US LLC's Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to the FCA US LLC's
customer center should include the following
information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile,
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 357
FCA US LLC C USTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (866) 726-4636
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing
difficulties, the manufacturer has installed
special Telecommunication Devices for the
Deaf (TDD) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional
teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can
communicate with FCA US LLC by dialing
1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar
Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle
extended protection plans authorized, endorsed
and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional
protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you
purchased a Mopar Vehicle Protection Plan, you
will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner
Identification Card in the mail within three weeks
of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer's Service Contract National
Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian
residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French).
10
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the FCA
US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
please refer to the contract documents, and
contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/om for further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/en for further
information.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar original equipment parts & accessories
and factory filled fluids are available from an
authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle to keep it operating at its best and
maintain its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON , D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 359
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
a complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These manuals make it easy to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle
systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all
tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
LLC vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om
To order a hard copy of your Owner’s
Information, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US)
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
10
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
361
INDEX
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A
Mobile Phone
................................................197
WARRANTY INFORMATION ......................358
A
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control)
..............................................134
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............305
Adding Fuel ....................................................144
Additives, Fuel ...............................................349
Adjust
Down
...........................................................30
Forward ....................................................... 30
Rearward..................................................... 30
Up................................................................ 30
Adjustable Pedals ............................................35
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................204
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation
......................................233
Air Bag Warning Light ................................231
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 238, 285
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ...................... 285
If Deployment Occurs ............................... 237
Knee Impact Bolsters ............................... 234
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .............. 239
Maintenance ............................................ 239
Transporting Pets ..................................... 259
Air Bag Light................................109 , 231, 260
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) .. 295
Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 296
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 296 , 297
Air Conditioner System ................................. 296
Air Conditioning Filter ..............................62 , 297
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................62
Air Filter ........................................................ 295
Air Pressure
Tires
......................................................... 330
Alarm
Security Alarm
....................................20 , 110
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle
........................................................... 9
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 304 , 352
Disposal ................................................... 306
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ....................... 208
Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 114
Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 215
Audio Settings ............................................... 190
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 165
Auto Down Power Windows ..............................72
Automatic Door Locks ......................................25
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............61
Automatic Transmission .......................126 , 308
Adding Fluid .............................................. 308
Fluid And Filter Change ............................. 308
Fluid Change ............................................. 308
Fluid Level Check ...................................... 308
Fluid Type ........................................308 , 355
Special Additives ...................................... 308
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ... 129
AutoPark ....................................................... 119
Aux Cord...........................................................68
Auxiliary Switches ............................................71
Axle Fluid..............................................309 , 355
Axle Lubrication ............................................ 309
11
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362
B
Battery
................................................. 110 , 292
Charging System Light ...............................110
Keyless Key Fob Replacement .................... 14
Belts, Seat .....................................................260
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing
................199
Body Builders Guide .......................................... 9
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................300
B-Pillar Location .............................................326
Brake Assist System ......................................209
Brake Control System ....................................209
Brake Fluid .......................................... 307 , 355
Brake System ...................................... 307 , 347
Fluid Check ...............................................307
Master Cylinder .........................................307
Parking ......................................................123
Warning Light ............................................109
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................125
Bulb Replacement .........................................317
Bulbs, Light .......................................... 261 , 317
C
Camera ......................................................... 142
Camera, Rear ................................................ 142
Camper ............................................................87
Capacities, Fluid ........................................... 352
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ............................................... 290
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..................... 305
Car Washes................................................... 343
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............................ 262
Cargo Light.......................................................49
CD................................................................. 192
Cellular Phone .............................................. 207
Center High Mounted Stop Light ................... 321
Center Seat Storage Compartment ..................64
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 323
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light)
......................... 117
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 259
Checks, Safety .............................................. 259
Child Restraint .............................................. 240
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ........................................... 243
Child Seat Installation ......................252 , 254
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ..... 251
Infant And Child Restraints ....................... 241
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 248
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 245
Older Children And Child Restraints .......... 242
Seating Positions ...................................... 244
Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 349
Cleaning
Wheels ...................................................... 337
Climate Control ................................................53
Manual ........................................................57
Cold Weather Operation ................................ 122
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 335
Contract, Service ........................................... 357
Controls ........................................................ 183
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 305
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
363
Cooling System
..............................................303
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .......................305
Coolant Level .................................. 304 , 306
Cooling Capacity ........................................352
Disposal Of Used Coolant ..........................306
Drain, Flush, And Refill ..............................304
Inspection .................................................306
Points To Remember .................................306
Pressure Cap .............................................305
Radiator Cap .............................................305
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) ........................ 304 , 352, 353
Corrosion Protection ......................................342
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ......................134
Cruise Light ...................................................116
Customer Assistance .....................................356
Cybersecurity .................................................165
D
Daytime Running Lights
................................... 46
Defroster, Rear Window ...................................57
Defroster, Windshield ....................................260
Deleting A Phone ...........................................199
Diagnostic System, Onboard .........................116
Differential, Limited Slip ................................133
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine)
................................................292
Disable Vehicle Towing ..................................283
Disc Drive ..................................................... 192
Disconnecting ............................................... 199
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...................... 306
Disturb .......................................................... 202
Door Ajar ....................................................... 111
Door Ajar Light .............................................. 111
Door Locks
Automatic ....................................................25
Doors ...............................................................21
Driver Memory Presets ................................. 190
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ......................................28
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water
.................................... 162
E
Electric Brake Control System
....................... 209
Anti-Lock Brake System ............................ 208
Electronic Roll Mitigation ................. 210 , 217
Electrical Power Outlets ...................................69
Electronic Range Select (ERS) ...................... 130
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 210
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ...... 111
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case ............. 131
Emergency Braking ....................................... 123
Emergency, In Case Of
Jump Starting ........................................... 276
Emission Control System Maintenance ........ 117
Engine ........................................................... 290
Air Cleaner ................................................ 295
Block Heater ............................................. 122
Break-In Recommendations ..................... 122
Checking Oil Level .................................... 292
Compartment ..................................290 , 291
Compartment Identification .............290, 291
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 353
Exhaust Gas Caution ................................ 262
Fails To Start ............................................. 121
Flooded, Starting ...................................... 121
Fuel Requirements ..........................348 , 352
Jump Starting ........................................... 276
Oil ...........................................294 , 352, 353
Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 290
Oil Filter .................................................... 295
Oil Reset ................................................... 100
Oil Selection.....................................294 , 352
Oil Synthetic .............................................. 294
Overheating .............................................. 279
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ... 238 , 285
Entry System, Illuminated ................................51
Ethanol.......................................................... 349
Exhaust Gas Cautions ................................... 262
Exhaust System ...................................262 , 302
Exterior Lights ........................................ 45 , 261
11
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364
F
Filters
Air Cleaner
.................................................295
Air Conditioning ..................................62 , 297
Engine Oil ........................................ 295 , 353
Engine Oil Disposal ...................................295
Flashers
Hazard Warning
.........................................263
Turn Signals ..............................49 , 115, 261
Flash-To-Pass ..................................................47
Flat Tire Stowage ...........................................274
Fluid Capacities .............................................352
Fluid Leaks ....................................................261
Fluid Level Checks
Brake
........................................................307
Engine Oil ..................................................292
Fluid, Brake ...................................................355
Fog Lights ...............................................48 , 320
Fold Flat Load Floor ......................................... 66
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................. 28
Four Wheel Drive ...........................................131
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................281
Front Axle (Differential) ..................................309
Fuel............................................................... 348
Adding ...................................................... 144
Additives ................................................... 349
Clean Air ................................................... 349
Ethanol ..................................................... 349
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................................. 145
Gasoline ................................................... 348
Light ......................................................... 115
Materials Added ....................................... 349
Methanol .................................................. 349
Octane Rating .........................348 , 349, 353
Requirements .................................. 348 , 352
Tank Capacity ........................................... 352
Fuses ............................................................ 309
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)
.....................41
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .............................. 145
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................ 349
Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 349
Glass Cleaning .............................................. 346
Grocery Bag Retainer .......................................33
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 147
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 146
Guide
Body Builders ................................................ 9
GVWR............................................................ 145
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising,
Or Shallow Standing Water
................... 162
Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 263
Head Restraints ...............................................33
Headlights ..................................................... 318
Automatic ....................................................47
Automatic High Beam ..................................47
Cleaning.................................................... 342
High Beam ...................................................46
Passing ........................................................47
Switch ..........................................................45
Heated Mirrors .................................................40
Heater, Engine Block ..................................... 122
Hill Descent Control ...................................... 213
Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................... 213
Hill Start Assist .............................................. 215
Hitches
Trailer Towing
........................................... 150
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .....................41
Hood Prop ........................................................76
Hood Release ...................................................76
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
365
I
Ignition
............................................................ 16
Switch ......................................................... 16
Illuminated Entry ............................................. 51
In Case Of Emergency ...................................263
Inside Rearview Mirror .....................36 , 37, 263
Instrument Cluster
Descriptions
..............................................115
Display ........................................................ 98
Engine Oil Reset ........................................100
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ....................346
Integrated Trailer Brake Control ....................153
Interior Appearance Care ...............................345
Interior Lights ..................................................50
Inverter
Power
.......................................................... 71
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ................................... 68
J
Jack Location
.................................................267
Jack Operation ...............................................267
Jump Starting ................................................276
K
Key Fob
Programming Additional Key Fobs
.............. 15
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .. 14
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) .. 15
Keyless Enter-N-Go ..........................................22
Passive Entry ...............................................22
Passive Entry Programming .........................22
Keys.................................................................13
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals
........................49
Lane Change Assist .........................................49
Latches ......................................................... 261
Hood............................................................76
Lead Free Gasoline ....................................... 348
Leaks, Fluid .................................................. 261
Life Of Tires ................................................... 333
Light Bulbs ........................................... 261 , 317
Lights ......................................................51 , 261
Air Bag .................................... 109 , 231, 260
Automatic Headlights ..................................47
Automatic High Beam ..................................47
Brake Assist Warning ............................... 213
Brake Warning .......................................... 109
Bulb Replacement .................................... 317
Cargo ...........................................................49
Center Mounted Stop ............................... 321
Courtesy/Reading .......................................50
Cruise ....................................................... 116
Daytime Running .........................................46
Engine Temperature Warning ................... 110
Exterior ..................................................... 261
Fog..................................................... 48 , 320
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 263
Headlights ...................................................45
High Beam ...................................................46
Hill Descent Control Indicator ................... 213
Interior .........................................................50
Low Fuel ................................................... 115
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ....... 111
Park .......................................................... 115
Passing ........................................................47
Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 109
Security Alarm .......................................... 110
Service...................................................... 317
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .............. 217
Traction Control ........................................ 213
Turn Signals ............49, 115, 261, 318, 320
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions
................................110 , 115
Limited-Slip Differential ....................... 133 , 309
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode ..................... 107
Load Shed Battery Saver On ......................... 107
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ........... 107
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............ 107
Loading Vehicle ............................................. 145
Tires.......................................................... 326
11
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366
Locks
Automatic Door
........................................... 25
Child Protection ........................................... 25
Power Door..................................................22
Low Tire Pressure System .............................217
Lubrication, Body ...........................................300
Lug Nuts ........................................................347
M
Maintenance Free Battery .............................292
Maintenance Schedule ..................................286
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) ...111
Manual
Park Release .............................................280
Service ......................................................359
Media Hub ....................................................... 68
Media Mode ..................................................192
Methanol .......................................................349
Mirrors ............................................................. 36
Electric Powered ......................................... 38
Heated ........................................................ 40
Outside........................................................37
Rearview .....................................36 , 37, 263
Trailer Towing .............................................. 40
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle .......................................................... 9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...................... 217
Mopar Parts .................................................. 358
MP3 Control .....................................................68
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................46
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period
......................... 122
O
Occupant Restraints ..................................... 221
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............ 348 , 349
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) ................... 163
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) ................... 163
Oil Filter, Change .......................................... 295
Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 295
Oil Pressure Light .......................................... 110
Oil Reset ....................................................... 100
Oil, Engine............................................ 294 , 353
Capacity.................................................... 352
Checking................................................... 292
Dipstick .................................................... 292
Disposal ................................................... 295
Filter ................................................ 295 , 353
Filter Disposal ........................................... 295
Identification Logo .................................... 294
Materials Added To .................................. 294
Pressure Warning Light ............................. 110
Recommendation ............................ 294 , 352
Synthetic................................................... 294
Viscosity.................................................... 352
Onboard Diagnostic System .......................... 116
Operating Precautions .................................. 116
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual
........................................ 359
Outside Rearview Mirrors .................................37
Overheating, Engine ...................................... 279
P
Paint Care
..................................................... 342
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To
A Mobile Phone
...................................... 197
Parking Brake ............................................... 123
ParkSense System, Rear ............................... 136
Passive Entry....................................................22
Pedals, Adjustable ...........................................35
Pets............................................................... 259
Phone Mode .................................................. 195
Pickup Box ................................................79 , 82
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 326
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
367
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses)
.......................310
Door Locks .................................................. 22
Inverter........................................................ 71
Mirrors......................................................... 38
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ................ 69
Seats ........................................................... 30
Sliding Rear Window ................................... 73
Steering.....................................................134
Sunroof ....................................................... 74
Windows...................................................... 72
Power Seats
Down
...........................................................30
Forward ....................................................... 30
Rearward..................................................... 30
Recline ........................................................ 31
Tilt ............................................................... 31
Up................................................................ 30
Power Steering Fluid ......................................355
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...................229
Presets ..........................................................190
Pretensioners
Seat Belts
..................................................229
R
Radial Ply Tires ............................................. 331
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .. 304, 305
Radio
Presets
..................................................... 190
Radio Controls .............................................. 183
Radio Mode .................................................. 183
Radio Operation ................................... 183 , 207
Radio Remote Controls ................................. 183
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...........................53
Rear Axle (Differential) .................................. 309
Rear Camera................................................. 142
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails ............................80
Rear ParkSense System ............................... 136
Reclining Rear Seats .......................................30
Recreational Towing ..................................... 158
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ..... 159
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) ....161
Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 349
Refrigerant .................................................... 297
Release, Hood .................................................76
Reminder, Seat Belt ...................................... 222
Remote Keyless Entry ......................................14
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............15
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ......... 183
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ...............................18
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features ............................................... 174
Uconnect Settings .................................... 174
Replacement Bulbs ....................................... 317
Replacement Tires ........................................ 333
Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 358
Restraints, Child ............................................ 240
Restraints, Head ..............................................33
Rotation, Tires ............................................... 340
S
Safety............................................................ 182
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 260
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...................... 261
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 358
Safety Features ............................................. 182
Safety Information, Tire ................................. 322
Safety Tips .................................................... 259
Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 262
Satellite Radio ............................................... 185
Saved Radio Stations .................................... 190
Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 286
Seat Belt Reminder ....................................... 109
11
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368
Seat Belts
............................................ 222 , 260
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...........................226
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ......226
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ..226
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ............229
Child Restraints .........................................240
Energy Management Feature ....................229
Extender ....................................................228
Front Seat ....................................... 222 , 225
Inspection .................................................260
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ....................225
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...................226
Operating Instructions ...............................225
Pregnant Women ......................................229
Pretensioners ............................................229
Reminder ..................................................222
Seat Belt Extender ....................................228
Seat Belt Pretensioner ..............................229
Untwisting Procedure ................................226
Seat Belts Maintenance ................................345
Seats ........................................................ 28 , 30
Adjustment ........................................... 28 , 30
Folding Floor ............................................... 66
Power .......................................................... 30
Rear Folding ................................................ 28
Reclining Rear ............................................. 30
Tilting .......................................................... 28
Security Alarm .........................................20 , 110
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 353
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................15
Service Assistance ........................................ 356
Service Contract ........................................... 357
Service Manuals ........................................... 359
Settings, Audio .............................................. 190
Shifting ......................................................... 124
Automatic Transmission ........................... 126
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer
Case Neutral (N)
................................... 159
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of
Transfer Case Neutral (N)
.................... 161
Signals, Turn ................................. 49 , 115, 261
Sirius Satellite Radio ..................................... 185
Favorites................................................... 188
Replay ...................................................... 186
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM ......................................... 188
Favorites................................................... 188
Replay ...................................................... 186
Sliding Rear Window, Power ............................73
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 338
Snow Plow .................................................... 157
Snow Tires .................................................... 334
Spare Tires .......................................... 335 , 336
Spark Plugs ................................................... 353
Speed Control
Accel/Decel .............................................. 136
Cancel....................................................... 136
Resume .................................................... 136
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...................... 134
Starting ......................................................... 119
Automatic Transmission ........................... 119
Button..........................................................16
Cold Weather ............................................ 122
Engine Fails To Start ................................. 121
Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) ............... 119
Steering
Power
........................................................ 134
Tilt Column...................................................26
Wheel, Heated .............................................26
Wheel, Tilt ....................................................26
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...................... 183
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ....... 183
Storage Compartment, Center Seat .................64
Storage, Vehicle ..................................... 62 , 341
Store Radio Presets ...................................... 190
Storing Your Vehicle ...................................... 341
Stuck, Freeing ............................................... 281
Sun Roof ..........................................................74
Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 216
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 294
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
369
T
Telescoping Steering Column
.......................... 26
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............ 61
Tilt
Down
...........................................................31
Up................................................................ 31
Tilt Steering Column ........................................ 26
Tip Start .........................................................119
Tire And Loading Information Placard ...........326
Tire Markings .................................................322
Tire Safety Information ..................................322
Tires...................................261 , 329, 335, 340
Aging (Life Of Tires) ...................................333
Air Pressure ...............................................329
Chains .......................................................338
Compact Spare .........................................335
General Information ........................ 329 , 335
High Speed ................................................331
Inflation Pressure ......................................330
Life Of Tires ...............................................333
Load Capacity .................................. 326 , 327
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .. 113 , 217
Quality Grading ..........................................340
Radial ........................................................331
Replacement .............................................333
Rotation ....................................................340
Safety .............................................. 322 , 329
Sizes......................................................... 323
Snow Tires ................................................ 334
Spare Tires ...................................... 335 , 336
Spinning ................................................... 332
Trailer Towing ........................................... 152
Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 332
Wheel Nut Torque ..................................... 347
To Open Hood ..................................................76
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...................... 151
Tonneau Cover ........................................88 , 342
Tonneau Cover Cleaning ............................... 342
Torque Specifications ................................... 347
Towing .......................................................... 146
Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 283
Guide........................................................ 151
Recreational ............................................. 158
Weight ...................................................... 151
Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 158
Traction......................................................... 162
Traction Control ............................................ 217
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................. 216
Trailer Towing ................................................ 146
Hitches ..................................................... 150
Minimum Requirements ........................... 151
Mirrors .........................................................40
Tips ........................................................... 157
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................ 151
Wiring ....................................................... 156
Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 151
Trailer Weight ................................................ 151
Transfer Case ................................................ 309
Electronically Shifted ................................ 131
Fluid.......................................................... 355
Transmission................................................. 126
Automatic ........................................ 126 , 308
Fluid.......................................................... 355
Maintenance ............................................ 308
Shifting ..................................................... 124
Transporting Pets .......................................... 259
Tread Wear Indicators ................................... 332
Turn Signals .........................49 , 115, 318, 320
11
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369
370
U
Uconnect
Phone Call Features
..................................201
Things You Should Know About
Your Uconnect Phone
...........................204
Uconnect Settings .....................................174
Uconnect Phone ............................................197
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress ......................202
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress
................202
Bluetooth Communication Link .................207
Call Continuation .......................................204
Call Controls ..............................................201
Call Termination ........................................203
Cancel Command ......................................197
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing
................199
Help Command .........................................197
Join Calls ...................................................203
Making A Phone Or Audio Device
A Favorite ..............................................200
Making A Second Call While Current
Call Is In Progress .................................203
Managing Your Favorites ...........................200
Natural Speech .........................................197
Operation ..................................................196
Overview ................................................... 195
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A
Mobile Phone
....................................... 197
Phonebook Download .............................. 200
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold .............. 203
Power-Up .................................................. 207
Recent Calls ............................................. 202
Redial ....................................................... 204
To Remove A Favorite ............................... 201
Toggling Between Calls ............................. 203
Touch-Tone Number Entry ........................ 202
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone ....204
Voice Command ....................................... 204
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features
....22, 174
Passive Entry Programming .........................22
Uconnect System .......................................... 180
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 340
Unleaded Gasoline ....................................... 348
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................... 226
USB..................................................................68
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area ...........................80
V
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
.............. 347
Vehicle Loading ................................... 145 , 327
Vehicle Maintenance .................................... 293
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ......................9
Vehicle Storage ...................................... 62 , 341
Voice Command ...............................................27
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................27
W
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Descriptions)
................. 112
Warranty Information .................................... 358
WARRANTY INFORMATION ..................... 358
Washers, Windshield .................................... 292
Washing Vehicle ............................................ 343
Water
Driving Through ........................................ 162
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ........................... 337
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 337
Wind Buffeting .................................................74
Window Fogging ...............................................62
Windows ..........................................................72
Power...........................................................72
Reset Auto-Up ..............................................73
Windshield Defroster .................................... 260
Windshield Washers .............................. 52 , 292
Fluid................................................... 52 , 292
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 300
Windshield Wipers ...........................................52
Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 300
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................53
21_DS_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself
unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular
telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common
questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired
with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated
non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and
equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/
or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-866-726-4636 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada), or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting
www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and
your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
FIRST EDITION
21_DS_OM_EN_USC
©2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
CANADA
MOPAR.COM/OM
U.S.
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app,
go directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
2021 RAM 1500 CLASSIC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2021 RAM 1500 CLASSIC
